Fiat - 500 Abarth - Owners Manual - 2014 - 2015

2015 FIAT 500 ABARTH 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 15FX24-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 ABARTH INCLUDES CABRIO VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. FIAT is a registered trademark of Fiat Group Marketing & Corporate Communication S.p.A., used under license by FCA US LLC. Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS ! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7 ! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8 ! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 1 4 INTRODUCTION The enclosed Warranty Information lists the services that Congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be as- FCA US LLC offers to its customers: sured that it represents precision workmanship, distinc- • The Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for tive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are maintaining its validity traditional to our vehicles. • The range of additional services available to FCA US This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisLLC customers tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenccustomer-oriented documents. Please take the time to ing and remain with the vehicle when sold. read these publications carefully. Following the instruc- When it comes to service, remember that your authorized tions and recommendations in this manual will help dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techassure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction. INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 5 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: 1 6 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION 7 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 1 This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears engraved on the right front door sill under the sill scuff plate, on an adhesive label applied to the right door opening on the B-Pillar, on the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number 8 INTRODUCTION VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Stamped VIN Location NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS ! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 ▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . .15 ▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ▫ Opening Power Top Remote Function . . . . . . .16 ▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .18 ▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Autoclose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ! POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 ▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .76 ▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 ! LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 ! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 ▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .39 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 The vehicle is supplied with a code card containing key The key fob contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) code numbers to order duplicate keys, and the authotransmitter with an integrated key. To use the mechanical rized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can key, simply push the mechanical key release button. be used to order duplicate keys. A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key Removal 1. Push the clutch pedal to the floor. 2. Bring the vehicle to a stop. 3. Apply the parking brake fully. 4. Place the shift lever into REVERSE gear. 5. Turn the key to place the ignition switch in the OFF/LOCK position. Mechanical Key Release Button 6. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder. 7. Release the clutch pedal. 2 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Ignition Switch Positions 1 — STOP (OFF/LOCK) 2 — MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) 3 — AVV (START) • Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into REVERSE gear, and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. CAUTION! An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Locking Doors With A Key You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the door, turn the key to the left. To unlock the door, turn the key to the right. Refer to “Body Lubrication” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for maintenance procedures. Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF/LOCK sounds a signal to remove the key. SENTRY KEY® The Sentry Key® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: A key which has not been programmed is also All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the been programmed to the vehicle electronics. ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle. Replacement Keys If the Vehicle Security Light is on after the key is turned NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the to the ON/RUN position, it indicates that there is a vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once problem with the electronics. a Sentry Key® has been programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. When havCAUTION! ing the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring • Always remove the Sentry Key® from the vehicle all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- The VIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of tended. keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an • The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not com- authorized dealer. patible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 General Information The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: 2 • This device may not cause harmful interference. • This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF EQUIPPED Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects. This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate using a hand-held Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit- Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE ter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice, the vehicle to activate the system. 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE within five seconds, to unlock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st Press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the current setting, refer to “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Opening Power Top Remote Function The remote keyless power top function can only be used with the engine off. Key Fob NOTE: The remote keyless power top function can be used to open the power top to the spoiler position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 Opening Power Top Remote Function: 1. OPEN — Push and hold the unlock button down on the key fob for a minimum of three seconds to initiate Power Top Open. The roof will stop opening whenever the unlock button on the key fob is released, or when it reaches the spoiler position. NOTE: If your power convertible top does not open with the remote, please refer to the #Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you: (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Before operating the power top, make sure that no moving parts of the convertible top can injure a person or animal. • Never place any extremities (hands, feet, etc.) near the convertible top components, the upper windshield area, the shelf area behind the rear seats, or the convertible top stowage area while raising or lowering the convertible top. • When using the power top button on RKE transmitter, if potential danger exists while lowering the top, release the button immediately to interrupt the operation. • Only drive the vehicle with the convertible top completely closed and latched or fully lowered into its stowage compartment. • Do not operate the power top when the vehicle is in motion. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 1. Push the mechanical key release button and release the mechanical key to access the battery case screw loPush and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitcated on the side of the Key Fob. ter to lock all doors and the liftgate. The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. To Lock The Doors And Liftgate Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to “Sentry Key®” in “Things To Know Before Starting” for further information. If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details. Transmitter Battery Replacement NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032. Mechanical Key Release Button THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 2. Rotate the screw located on the side of the Key Fob 3. Take out the battery case. Remove and replace the using a small screwdriver. battery observing its polarity. 2 Key Fob Screw Location Battery Case Removed 4. Refit the battery case inside the Key Fob and turn the screw to lock it into place. 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and distance, check for these two conditions: RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the 1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of following conditions: the battery is a minimum of three years. General Information • This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB • This device must accept any interference received, radios. including interference that may cause undesired operation. DOOR LOCKS NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved The door locks can be manually locked or unlocked from by the party responsible for compliance could void the inside the vehicle by using the door handle. If the door user’s authority to operate the equipment. handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 WARNING! (Continued) Driver’s Door Lock Handle WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. (Continued) • For personal security and safety in the event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position, apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into REVERSE gear, and remove the Key Fob from the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued) 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. NOTE: To prevent the key from being locked in the vehicle, the doors will automatically unlock if the driver’s door handle is pushed when the key is in the ignition. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Power Door Locks — If Equipped A power door lock switch is incorporated into the driver door handle. Push or pull the handle to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate. If the driver’s door handle is pushed a red lock indicator will show on the driver’s door handle (indicating locked) when the door is closed, the door will lock. Driver’s Power Door Lock Handle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Autoclose POWER WINDOWS When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically Power Window Switches when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The There are single window controls located on the shifter auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled using bezel, below the climate controls, which operate the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). driver and passenger door windows. The window conTo change the Autoclose setting in the EVIC, proceed as trols will operate when the ignition switch is in the follows: ON/RUN position. 1. Briefly push the MENU button “On” or “Off” will flash on the display (according to the previous setting). 2. Push the + or – button for setting. 3. Briefly push the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do not let children play with power windows. Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 2 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. LIFTGATE Power Window Switches Auto-Down The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch for approximately one second, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. To unlock the liftgate, use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or activate the power door lock switches located on the front door handles. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 To open the liftgate, squeeze the liftgate release handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion. WARNING! • Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle. • If you are required to drive with the liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control blower switch is set at high speed. Do not use the recirculation mode. Liftgate Handle Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when opening the liftgate in cold weather. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, Some of the most important safety features in your move the seat as far back as possible and use the vehicle are the restraint systems: proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”) • Seat Belt Systems 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child • Child Restraints restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chilImportant Safety Precautions dren who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled Please pay close attention to the information in this up in a vehicle with a rear seat. section. It tells you how to use your restraint system OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind possible. them or under their arm. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your risk of harm from a deploying air bag: child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. WARNING! 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could Seat Belt Systems be injured. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under #If You Need Assistance.# Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. 2 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occuEnhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat (BeltAlert) belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver 5 mph (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out- visual notification. board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. (Continued) 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. (Continued) (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. (Continued) 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 2 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its the latch plate. stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the fully. folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt Extender Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when shoulder belt. the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a anchor point. Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occudegrees to create a fold that begins immediately above pant, it must be removed. the latch plate. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision. Seat Belt Pretensioner The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts worn snugly and positioned properly. throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- Restraints” section of this manual. The table below straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- defines the type of feature for each seating position. sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be • seating position equipped with a switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked. The seat belt will still retract to First Row remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic Second Locking Mode is available on all passenger seating Row positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is • N/A — Not Applicable installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this • ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor feature. Children 12 years old and under should always If the passenger seating position is equipped with an be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the WARNING! seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearonly the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- ably facing child restraint. wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle plate into the buckle until you hear a #click.# with a rear seat. Driver N/A ALR Center N/A N/A Passenger ALR ALR 2 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Air Bag System Components • Seat Belt Pretenioners • Seat Belt Buckle Switch Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag • Seat Track Position Sensors system components: Advanced Front Air Bags • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat • Air Bag Warning Light belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air • Steering Wheel and Column Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The • Instrument Panel passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The • Knee Impact Bolsters words “SRS AIRBAG” and “AIRBAG” are embossed on • Advanced Front Air Bags the air bag covers. • Supplemental Side Air Bags • Supplemental Knee Air Bag • Front and Side Impact Sensors 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster 3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Driver Knee Impact Bolster • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides Advanced Front Air Bags. output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as WARNING! determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air sensors or other system components. bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel, Advanced Front Air Bag Features The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position. This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bags to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. (Continued) 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Advanced Front Air Bag Operation Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. Knee Impact Bolsters The Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides enThe Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the hanced protection during a frontal impact by working driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front Front Air Bags. Air Bags. Supplemental Side Air Bags WARNING! Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. • Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 • Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts. SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side impact events. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced that is appropriate for the size of the child. Front Air Bags deploy. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must WARNING! • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air immediately after deployment. bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or the air bag system. throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s inor all of the following may occur: structions for cleaning. • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a bags will not be in place to protect you. carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by WARNING! contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot significantly within a few days, or if you have any protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, blistering, see your doctor immediately. If A Deployment Occurs (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING! (Continued) seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position. • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, • Unlock the doors automatically. but they will open during air bag deployment. System Reset Procedure • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an Depending on the nature of the event the left and right authorized dealer immediately. turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel cluster, Enhanced Accident Response System may both be blinking and will continue to blink until the In the event of an impact, if the communication network ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. In order to remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine follow the system reset procedure. whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: 2 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Customer Action 1. Turn ignition OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 2. Turn ignition ON. 3. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 4. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 5. Turn Right Turn Signal Switch ON. 6. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch ON. 7. Turn Left Turn Signal Switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). 8. Turn ignition OFF. 9. Turn Hazard Flashers OFF (Manually). Customer Will See Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light BLINKS. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light BLINKS. Left Turn Light is ON SOLID. Right Turn Light is ON SOLID. Left Turn Light is OFF. Right Turn Light is OFF. System is now reset and the engine may be started. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 If a reset procedure step is not completed within 45 The ORC contains a backup power supply system that seconds, then the turn signal lights will turn off and the may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or reset procedure must be performed again in order to be it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. successful. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds Air Bag Warning Light for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to The air bags must be ready to inflate for your the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malprotection in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on with air bag system electrical components. again after initial startup. The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The the OFF position the air bag system is not on and the air diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. bags will not inflate. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the on position, and stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. (Continued) • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air 2 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is were buckled/fastened required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, accelerator and/or brake pedal such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the • How fast the vehicle was traveling vehicle or the EDR. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE: children from newborn size to the child almost large • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s • http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/ safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used WARNING! rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. Infants And Child Restraints The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. (Continued) Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use way back? a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Seat Belt Only LATCH – Seat Belt + Top Lower Anchors Lower Anchors Tether Anchor Only + Top Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH) Restraint System Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle • • Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating position Top Tether Anchorage Symbol THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint? 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be used together to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint? No Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraint. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage? No Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Yes Can the head restraints be removed? Yes Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Yes, all may be removed THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 Locating LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. 2 LATCH Anchorages Locating Tether Anchorages There are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat. 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH WARNING! This vehicle does not have a center seating position. Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in the center of the back seat. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by move it to its rear-most position to make room for the pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt child seat. You may also move the front seat forward path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) to allow more room for the child seat. in any direction. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt: restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat- When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child ing position. restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat tions to attach a tether anchor. belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack installation, instead of buckling it behind the child rein the straps according to the child restraint manufac- straint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt turer’s instructions. path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 2 • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat? Weight limit of the Child Restraint Can the head restraints be removed? Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt against the belt path of the child restraint? Yes Yes No Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of the child restraint. Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Yes, all may be removed Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you position. For some second row seats, you may need to will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a now in the Automatic Locking mode. better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is rear-most position to make room for the child seat. locked, you should not be able to pull out any webYou may also move the front seat forward to allow bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. more room for the child seat. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor lap portion around the child restraint while you push to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. the child restraint rearward and downward into the Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. vehicle seat. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the “click.” seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. WARNING! (Continued) tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the (Continued) 1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage. You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 tether anchorage for that seating position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available. 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard side of the head restraint. Rear Seat Tether Strap Mounting 3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram. restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 CAUTION! WARNING! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust Gas WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to system. feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a able. collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury. • Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners. • Never place or install floor mats or other floor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle. • Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top of already installed floor mats. Additional floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals. • Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning. • Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control. • If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory. Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or mounting can cause interference with the brake pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of control of the vehicle. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Door Latches Tires Fluid Leaks Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires for proper cold inflation pressure. Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. 2 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED . .86 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Lowering The Power Top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86 ▫ Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Raising The Power Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 ! BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION . .94 ▫ Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure . . . . .88 ▫ Wind Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .90 ▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Folding Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 ▫ Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication Overview — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 ▫ The Hands-Free Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95 ! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Forward/Rearward Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .101 ▫ Recline Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 ▫ Seat Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ▫ EZ Entry Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .114 ! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .107 ! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .114 ! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Front Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . .115 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ▫ Rear Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 ! TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . .118 ▫ High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .119 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .111 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ! REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Emergency Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Rear Park Assist Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123 ▫ Sun Shade — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Rear Park Assist Warning Display . . . . . . . . . .124 ! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Rear Park Assist Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ! CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .125 ! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Failure Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 ! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System . . . . . . .128 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Park Assist System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .128 ! CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 ! POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .130 ! REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ To Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ To Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 3 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE POWER CONVERTIBLE TOP — IF EQUIPPED NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a power convertible top, the • The power top buttons will operate when the ignition power convertible top switch is located on the overhead switch is turned to the ACC/ON/RUN position. console. The switch contains two buttons. The passenger side button, is used to open the power top, and the driver • The power top can be remotely operated with the key fob. Refer to “Opening Power Top Remote Function” side button, is used to close the power top. in “Things To Know Before Starting” for more information. Lowering The Power Top Auto Open Push the top open button approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top open button for approximately one second a second time to fully open the convertible top. Manual Open Power Convertible Top Switch For manual open, push and hold the open button until desired roof position or until spoiler position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 NOTE: Vertical movement only operates in auto open/ NOTE: Rail lubrication is recommended every 2000 cycles, or if scratching noises due to dust are present. close mode. Refer to “Fluids, Lubes, and Genuine Part” in “MaintainRaising The Power Top ing Your Vehicle” for information. Auto Close From the convertible top fully open position, push the top close button for approximately one second for the three-quarter open/spoiler position. Push the top close button for approximately one second a second time for the one-quarter open position. Push and hold close button to fully close convertible top. Manual Close For manual close, push and hold the close button until desired position until one-quarter open position. Push and hold again for full close position. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material: • Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they can damage the top material. Also, increased water pressure may force water past the weather strips. • Remove any standing water from the top and dry the surface before opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle’s interior. (Continued) 3 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! (Continued) • Use care when washing the vehicle, water pressure directed at the weather strip seals may cause water to leak into the vehicle’s interior. WARNING! The convertible top does not provide the structural protection that a reinforced metal roof does and the fabric top cannot be expected to prevent the ejection of the occupants in a collision. Therefore, it is important that all occupants wear their seat belts at all times. Death or serious injuries could occur if you are ejected from the vehicle during a collision. Power Convertible Top Relearn Procedure If your power convertible top does not operate in the Auto Opening/Closing mode (automatically opening/ closing to the one-quarter open and three-quarter open comfort stops), or if the remote keyless power top function is inoperable, or if the trunk lid does not open the following relearn procedure may be necessary. 1. Confirm that the door/trunk lid are closed. 2. Begin with the top in the fully closed position (using manual mode). 3. Hold the OPEN button to move the top to the fully open position. 4. CONTINUE to hold the OPEN button for an additional three seconds. 5. Release the OPEN button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 6. Hold the CLOSED button to move the top to the fully NOTE: DO NOT interrupt this activity. closed position. If the power convertible top does not relearn repeat the 7. CONTINUE to hold the CLOSED button until the top procedure a second time. begins to cycle fully open, then release the CLOSED Wind Stop button. The Wind Stop installs in the backseat area of the vehicle. At the end of step 7 the top will automatically cycle to the The Wind Stop will not interfere with power top operafully open position, and then close to the 1/4 open tion. Therefore, it can remain installed when the top is up. position. This will confirm that the relearn procedure was success- MIRRORS ful. Inside Day/Night Mirror Auto Open/Close will now be functional. Trunk lid The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for operation will be functional. Remote Keyless Power Top various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center Function will be functional. on the view through the rear window. 3 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or off by pushing the button at the base of the mirror. A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate. NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse. Adjusting Rearview Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 Power Mirrors The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s door trim panel. 3 Automatic Dimming Mirror CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Power Mirror Switches The power mirror controls consist of a mirror select switch and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE mirror, push the mirror select switch to either the L (left) Spotter Mirror — If Equipped or R (right) to select the mirror you need to adjust. Some models are equipped with a driver’s side spotter Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four mirror. The spotter mirror allows for a greater range of arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to visibility on the driver’s side of the vehicle. move. WARNING! Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Spotter Mirror UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 Folding Mirrors Sun Visors The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid damage. The mirror has three detent positions: full forward, normal and full rearward. The driver and passenger sun visors are located on the headliner, near the front windshield. The sun visor can be rotated downward or up against the door glass. Both sun visors are equipped with courtesy mirrors. Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. Sun Visor (Passenger Side Shown) 3 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE you are not required to train the voice recognition system to recognize your voice. This implies that the system is Blue&Me™ Hands-Free Communication Overview nearly equally performing with different persons, i.e.: the — If Equipped voice recognition system is of the “speaker independent” Windows Mobile™-based FIAT BLUE&ME™ is a per- type. sonal telematic system enabling you to use communicaWith this system you can also play your favorite music tion and entertainment applications expressly designed stored on USB device and select tracks and playback for use in the car. modes with both voice commands or buttons on the The BLUE&ME™ system installed on your car is steering wheel. equipped with a hands-free kit, message reader and This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules media player, and it is preset for future installation of subject to the following two conditions: additional services. The BLUE&ME™ system, fully integrated with voice • This device may not cause harmful interference. BLUE&ME™ HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION commands, buttons on the steering wheel and multifunc- • This device must accept all interference received, intion display messages, gives you the possibility of intercluding interference that may cause undesired operaacting with your Bluetooth® wireless technology mobile tion. phone (even if you keep it in your pocket or bag) without having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel. To use voice commands UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 steering wheel controls and the instrument panel multiThe basic characteristic of this hands-free kit is voice function display. Please refer to the Fiat Blue & Me Radio recognition with Bluetooth® wireless technology. With Supplement for further information. this system you can make and receive calls safely and securely by using either voice commands or buttons on the steering wheel. This can be done under any driving condition without ever having to take your eyes off the road or remove your hands from the steering wheel, as required by current laws. The Hands-Free Kit Bluetooth® wireless technology enables wireless connection between your mobile phone and the hands-free kit installed on your car. To use the hands-free kit, you need a Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone. This hands-free kit Steering Wheel Hands Free Buttons gives you the possibility of interacting vocally with your mobile phone while driving, even if your mobile device 1 — Mute/ESC 3 — Phone Hang Up 4 — Voice Recognition (VR) does not feature Voice Recognition. You can also interact 2 — Phone/Menu with your mobile phone manually and visually using the 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To get started with BLUE&ME™ hands-free kit with • To interact with BLUE&ME™ you can use either the voice recognition, you have to simply pair your buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. Bluetooth® wireless technology enabled mobile phone With voice recognition, you can perform system funcwith the system. tions by speaking voice commands, also identified as “keywords”. When the system recognizes a keyword, Pairing is an operation that has to be made only once. it will respond with the appropriate action. Voice NOTE: recognition is an easy and convenient way to use BLUE&ME™. • During the mobile phone pairing procedure, BLUE&ME™ attempts to detect a phone equipped with Bluetooth® wireless technology within range and then establishes the connection using a Personal Identification Number (PIN). • Once your phone is paired, you have the option to transfer your mobile phone contacts to the hands-free kit, to make a phone call either by using the contacts list or directly pronouncing the phone number, to answer a call and also to answer another incoming phone call. All the system functions are available within the BLUE&ME™ Main Menu. When the car is not moving, you can scroll through the complete menu by using either the buttons on the steering wheel or the voice commands. When you are travelling, you can interact with BLUE&ME™ by using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands relevant only to phone functions (LAST CALLS and PHONEBOOK) and the media player. To activate settings when travelling you can only use voice commands. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 The hands-free kit enables the following operations: • • • • • Conference Call — you can call another contact while you are engaged in a phone conversation (with Contact Calling By Voice — you can call a contact in Bluetooth® phones supporting this option). your mobile phone phonebook using your voice. You can also call a contact in your phonebook by scanning • Call Waiting — while engaged in a phone conversathrough the entries on the multifunction display. (To tion, you can receive notification of another incoming use this option you have to transfer your mobile phone phone call, answer the other incoming phone call, and contacts to the hands-free kit phonebook). switch between two ongoing phone conversations. (Call waiting is only supported by a subset of compatDigit Dialing By Voice — you can dial a phone ible mobile phones). number by pushing the VR button on the steering wheel and speaking the digits to be dialed. • Refusing Incoming Call Or Ending A Call — you can refuse an incoming call or end a current call by pushing To Call The SMS Text Sender — call directly the last the Phone Hang-up button on the steering wheel. SMS text sender or the sender of a message received After pairing and connecting your phone with the and stored in the BLUE&ME™ inbox. BLUE&ME™ system, you can make phone calls by To Answer A Call — you can answer an incoming call speaking keywords or pushing buttons on the steering by pushing the MENU/Phone button on the steering wheel. When using the hands-free phone, the audio wheel. output of a phone conversation is heard through your car sound speakers. 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Message reader functions are managed by the control The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables automatic buttons on the steering wheel or by the BLUE&ME™ reading, through the car sound system, of the SMS texts voice commands. you receive on your Bluetooth® wireless technology The BLUE&ME™ message reader enables the following mobile phone that are received when the phone is paired operations: and connected to the BLUE&ME™ system. It does not provide access to messages that were received before the • To display an indicator on the instrument panel that indicates you have received a new SMS text. It will device was connected with the BLUE&ME™ system. The display the sender’s number/name and will ask you message reader will also interpret many abbreviations whether to read the text of the message to you. and emoticons contained in the SMS text. NOTE: Not all mobile phones support the SMS text message • To manage the list of SMS texts received on your BLUE&ME™ paired mobile phone. reader function or automatic phonebook transfer via Message Reader Bluetooth®. For further information on the list of compatible • To read the messages received and stored. Messages mobile phones go to http://www.fiatusa.com, find the can be read multiple times. SUPPORT section near the bottom of web page and click on • To call the SMS text sender using the buttons on the the Bluetooth® logo. steering wheel or voice commands. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 • To delete individual messages or the entire inbox using In this way, while you are driving you can play your the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. favorite music collections. The BLUE&ME™ system can also recognize and read • iPod® Player — See dedicated paragraph under Media Player Functions. abbreviations, if any (e.g. “ILUVU” will be read like “I love you”) and interpret the most usual emoticons (e.g. :-) The media player enables the following operations: will be read like “Smile”), that are currently used to write • Digital Audio Playback — You can play all your SMS texts. digital audio files (.mp3, .wma, .wav, .aac) or play a Media Player customized playlist (.m3u or .wpl format). With the BLUE&ME™ media player you can play the • Audio File Selection By Category — You can play all digital audio files stored on a USB device by simply audio files of a certain category, e.g.: album, artist or connecting it to the USB port located in the center console genre. of the car. A second USB port, used for charging only, is located in the glovebox. • Playback Options — While playing tracks you can select the following options: Play, Stop, Next track, Previous track, Shuffle and Loop track. 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The media player does not support audio files compressed with other formats and DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected audio files. Non-supported audio files that may be present on the USB device will be ignored. • To use the media player, you have to simply connect (directly or by an extension lead) your USB device to the center console USB port. After turning the ignition key to ON, BLUE&ME™ will start building your media library. At the end of this operation you can surf the complete library and scroll its categories as required using the buttons on the steering wheel or voice commands. BLUE&ME™ will then play your selection via the car sound system. WARNING! • Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control, accident and injury. It is strongly recommended that you use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take your focus off the road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. • The use of any handheld device while driving is not recommended. Use voice-operated systems when possible. Follow all applicable laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Keep the Owner’s Manual in the car: when kept in the car, the Owner’s Manual will be available for you and other users unfamiliar with the system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first time, all persons have access to the Owner’s Manual and read its instructions and safety information carefully. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. Forward/Rearward Adjustment The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Recline Adjustment Adjusting Bar The recline adjustment lever is located on the inboard While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the side of the seat. To recline the seatback, lift up the recline seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the lever, lean back until the desired position has been desired position is reached. Then, using body pressure, reached, and release the lever. move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Seat Height Adjustment The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pump the lever upward to raise the seat height, or pump the lever downward to lower the seat height. Recline Lever WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. Height Adjuster 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lift the seatback upright and push the seat rearward to The driver and front passenger seats have an EZ entry its locked position once the rear passengers are seated. feature for rear seat passengers. Pull upward on the Memory Feature release tether, located on the outboard side of the seatBoth front seats have a memory feature, which can back, dump the seatback forward, then slide the seat operate in two ways: forward to allow access in and out of the rear seat. Memory Function Option 1 — Full Seat Back And Track Fore/Aft Position Memory: EZ Entry Feature After using the EZ entry function, the seatback angle and the Track fore/aft adjuster can both re-lock into the position they were most recently adjusted to. This is accomplished if the seat is moved fully rearward to its last fore/aft position on the tracks before the seat back is returned upright. EZ Entry Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Memory Function Option 2 — Seat Back Only Memory: Push the switch once to turn on the heated seats. Push the switch a second time to shut the heating elements off. After using the EZ entry function, the seat back may first be returned upright prior to going back to the last NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt fore/aft (memory) position on the tracks. This results in within two to five minutes. the seat back memory being set only – The track will then be locked forward of its last set fore/aft memory posiWARNING! tion. To then reset the fore/aft track memory feature (to reestablish Memory Function Option 1), the seat has to be • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin returned fully rearward to its last fore/aft memory track because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, position as described in Memory Function Option 1. spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care Heated Seats — If Equipped when using the seat heater. It may cause burns On some models, the front driver and passenger seats even at low temperatures, especially if used for may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions long periods of time. and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are located on the center instrument panel area. (Continued) 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rearimpact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. Rear Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push downward on the head restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on tether routing. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 3 Adjustment Button TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood, two latches must be released. 1. Pull the bottom of the RED hood release lever, located on the left kick panel, rearward. Hood Release Lever 2. Rotate the safety catch under the front edge of the hood, near the center, and raise the hood. 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Hood Safety Latch Location Hood Prop Rod 3. Lift the hood prop rod that clips to the right side (left In hot climates, the prop rod may be hot. Pick up the prop side when standing in front of the hood) of the engine rod at the foam on the end of the prop rod. compartment. Place the hood prop rod in the hole of hood hinge to secure the hood in the open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 inches (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged. WARNING! Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. LIGHTS Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever, located on the left side of the steering wheel, controls the operation of the headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light and turn signals. NOTE: The external lights can only be turned on with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Headlights Rotate the end of the multifunction lever upward to the first detent for headlight operation. 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE High Beams With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever towards the instrument panel to turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel to turn off the high beams. Flash-To-Pass Headlight Operation You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beams until the lever is released. NOTE: When the headlights are turned on, the Daytime Parking Lights Running Lights will be deactivated. To turn on the parking lights, remove the key or turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK position and turn on the headlights. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped To activate the Daytime Running Lights (DRL), rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the O symbol. NOTE: The low beams and side/taillights will not be on with DRL. 3 If allowed by law in the country in which the vehicle was purchased the DRL function can be turned on or off using the display menus. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Turn Signals Turn Signal Operation Push the multifunction lever upward to signal a right NOTE: The indicators will automatically turn off when turn or downward to signal a left turn. The correspond- the turn has been completed and the steering wheel is ing indicator in the instrument cluster will blink to returned to a straight position. indicate the operation of the turn signal. 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lane Change Assist Deactivation Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond Pull the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash and hold it for more than two seconds. three times then automatically turn off. Interior Lights Follow Me Home/Headlight Delay The interior light switches are located in the overhead When this feature is selected the driver can choose to console. The interior lights can be set to three different have the headlights remain on for a preset period of time. positions (Off/Left Position, Center Position, On/Right Position). Activation Using the switch on the left overhead, push the switch to Remove the key or turn the ignition to the OFF/LOCK the right from its center position and the lights are always position, and pull the multifunction lever toward the on. Push the switch to the left from its center position and steering wheel, within two minutes. Each time the lever the lights are always off. Leave the switch in the center is pulled, the activation of the lights will be extended by position, and the lights are turned on and off when the 30 seconds. The activation of the lights can be extended to doors are opened or closed. The switch on the right side a maximum of 210 seconds. of the overhead console controls the map or reading function of the lights. Push the switch to the right to turn on the right light and push the switch to the left to turn on the left light. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 CAUTION! • When the doors are unlocked with the Key Fob a 10 second timer is activated. Before getting out of the vehicle be sure that the switch is in the center position or that the lights are off to avoid draining the battery. • When the doors are locked with the Key Fob the lights will turn off. Interior Light Timing (Center Position) There are four different modes of operation that can be activated in this position: Interior Light Timing (On/Right Position) • When all doors are closed a 15 minute timer is activated. NOTE: The timer is deactivated when the key is moved • When one door is opened a three minute timer is into the ON/RUN position. activated. • When the key is removed from the ignition (within two minutes of the ignition being turned off), a 10 second timer is activated. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Push the switch once to turn the front fog lights on. Push The fog light switch is located on the center stack of the the switch a second time to turn the front fog lights off. instrument panel, just below the radio. WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Front Fog Lights — If Equipped The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on the right side of the steering column. NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Fog Light Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Front Windshield Wiper Operation Windshield Wiper Off There are five different modes of operation for the front This is the normal position of the wiper lever. windshield wipers. The windshield wiper lever can be Intermittent Wiper Operation raised or lowered to access these modes: Push the lever downward to the first detent. The wipers will operate intermittently. NOTE: The Intermittent function only has one detent but wiper delay will vary with changes in vehicle speed. As vehicle speed increases the delay time will decrease. Low Speed Push the lever downward to the second detent. The wipers will operate at low speed. High Speed Windshield Wiper Operation Push the lever downward to the third detent. The wipers will operate at high speed. 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual High Speed/Mist Push the lever upward from the off position. The wipers will operate at high speed to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. This operation will continue until the lever is released. When the lever is released, the wipers will return to the off position and automatically shut off. Front Windshield Washer Operation Pull the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel to activate the washers. The wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. CAUTION! • Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. • In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. • Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position. If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, damage to the wiper motor may occur. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Rear Windshield Wiper Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward to the first detent past the intermittent settings for intermittent wipe operation. With the front windshield wiper active, rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer lever upward. The rear wiper will operate in the same mode as the front windshield wipers, but at half the frequency. When the transmission is shifted into REVERSE, the rear wiper will automatically operate at Low Speed and return to normal operation when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. 3 Rear Wiper Operation NOTE: The windshield wipers/washers will only operate with the ignition in the ON/RUN position. 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Windshield Washer Operation Push the windshield wiper/washer lever toward the instrument panel to activate the rear washer. Push and hold the lever for more than a half second and the wipers will activate automatically for three cycles after the lever is released. TILT STEERING COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt control lever is located on the left-side of the steering column, below the turn signal controls. Tilt Control Lever Push down on the lever to unlock the column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired. Push the lever up to lock the column firmly in place. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 WARNING! The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. 3 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). Electronic Speed Control Buttons 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. WARNING! Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. To Activate To Set A Desired Speed Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderA soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC button, standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): set speed memory. Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed in U.S. Speed (mph) memory. • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph To Resume Speed increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) To Deactivate button and release. Resume can be used at any speed • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will above 25 mph (40 km/h). continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in- • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. the new set speed will be established. To Decrease Speed Metric Speed (km/h) When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. The drivers preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information. continue to decrease until the button is released, then The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected the new set speed will be established. speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): To Accelerate For Passing U.S. Speed (mph) Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the The Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible vehicle set speed. indications of the distance between the rear fascia/ bumper and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains during a parking maneuver. Refer to the “Park Assist speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on System Usage Precautions” for the limitations of this moderate hills is normal. system and recommendations. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so The Rear Park Assist is automatically activated when the it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed transmission is placed into REVERSE. Control. Rear Park Assist Sensors WARNING! Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. The four Rear Park Assist sensors, located in the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles, in the horizontal direction, from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 55 in (140 cm) from the center of the rear fascia/bumper and up to 24 in (60 cm) from the corners of the rear fascia/bumper, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. 3 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If several obstacles are detected, the Rear Park Assist Rear Park Assist Display system indicates the nearest obstacle. When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display The minimum height of a detectable obstacle corresponds will turn ON indicating the system status. to the maximum height of an obstacle that would clear the The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing underside of the car during the parking maneuver. arcs in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. Rear Park Assist Warning Display The Rear Park Assist Warning screen is located within the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides audible and visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to #Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)# in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel# for further information. If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the center rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show solid arcs in the left and/or right rear region and will produce an audible alert. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show fewer arcs and the audible alert becomes more frequent. Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts If an obstacle is behind the vehicle when the transmission is placed into REVERSE, an audible alert is activated. The tones emitted by the loudspeaker inform the driver that the vehicle is approaching an obstacle. The pauses between the tones are directly proportional to the distance from the obstacle. Pulses emitted in quick succession indicate the presence of a very close obstacle. A continuous tone indicates that the obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away. 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Audible And Visual Signals Supplied By The Rear Park Assist System SIGNAL Obstacle Distance MEANING An obstacle is present within the sensors’ field of view Failure Sensor or System failures INDICATION Audible signal (dashboard loudspeaker) • Sound pulses emitted at a rate that increases as the distance decreases. • Emits continuous tone at 12 in (30 cm). • Adjustable volume level. (Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information). Visual signal (EVIC) • Arcs are shown based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. (Refer to “Rear Park Assist Display” for further information). Visual Signal (instrument panel) • Icon appears on display. • Message is displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (where provided). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 The warning icon is illuminated and a message is displayed on the EVIC display (if equipped). Refer to #Electronic Vehicle Information Center The audible signal is turned off immediately if the (EVIC)# in “Understanding Your Instrument distance increases. The tone cycle remains constant if the Panel” for further information. distance measured by the inner sensors is constant. If this condition occurs for the external sensors, the signal is The sensors and wiring are tested continuously when the turned off after 3 seconds (stopping warnings during ignition is in the ON/RUN position. Failures are indicated immediately if they occur when the system is ON. maneuvers parallel to walls). While audible signals are emitted, the audio system is not muted. Failure Indications A malfunction of the Rear Park Assist sensors or system is indicated, during REVERSE gear engagement, by the instrument panel warning icon and message displayed on the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) display. Even if the system is able to identify that a specific sensor is in failure condition, the EVIC shall indicate that the Rear Park Assist system is unavailable, without reference to the sensor in failure condition. If even a single sensor fails, the entire system must be disabled. The system is turned off automatically. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water, car wash not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. In debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not washing stations, clean sensors quickly keeping the vaworking properly. The Rear Park Assist system might por jet/high pressure washing nozzles at least 4 in (10 not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. could provide a false indication that an obstacle is Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. behind the fascia/bumper. Park Assist System Usage Precautions • Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must not be NOTE: placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear fascia/ bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can • Ensure that the outer surface and the underside of the result in the system misinterpreting a close object as a rear bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt sensor problem, causing a failure indication to be or other obstruction to keep the Rear Park Assist displayed in the instrument cluster. system operating properly. Cleaning The Rear Park Assist System • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of Rear Park Assist. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 CAUTION! WARNING! • Rear Park Assist is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using Rear Park Assist in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using Rear Park Assist. • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. (Continued) 3 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Before using the Rear Park Assist System, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the warning display turns on the single flashing arc and sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED The power sunroof roof switch is located in the overhead console. Power Sunroof Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. • In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured. • Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury may result. To Open Push and hold the power sunroof switch rearward for approximately one second and the sunroof will stop at the vented position. Push the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second and release, the sunroof will open fully, then stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. To Close With the sunroof in the full open position, pull the power sunroof button and hold it for approximately one second, the sunroof will return to the vented position. Pull the switch a second time and hold for approximately one second to completely close the sunroof. 3 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Pinch Protect Feature Emergency Operation This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, push the switch forward and release to Express Close. In case of electrical failure the sunroof can be operated with the hex wrench that is located in the glove box. There is a plug located in the rear of the sunroof opening at the center of the vehicle. Removing the plug reveals a hex opening in the motor assembly of the sunroof. Insert the hex wrench and turn, moving the sunroof to the desired location. Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window. Sun Shade — If Equipped For vehicles equipped with either a power sunroof or a fixed glass roof, there is a sun shade that can be open or closed. To open the sun shade push the tab and move the shade to a full open position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 3 Manual Sun Shade Power Outlet Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or START position. Insert the cigar lighter or There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet, accessory plug into the outlet for use. To preserve the located in the floor console, for added convenience. This power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and heating element, do not hold the lighter in the heating position. other low power devices. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Power Outlet Fuse Location Underhood F15 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Front Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 WARNING! CAUTION! To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution. • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER — IF EQUIPPED CUPHOLDERS This is located on the center console, in front of the cup For the driver and front passenger, cupholders are loholders. To activate the cigar lighter, push and release the cated on the floor console between the front seats. knob. After a few seconds the knob automatically returns to its initial position, and the cigar lighter is ready for use. WARNING! When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the cigar lighter with care. Always check that the cigar lighter has turned off. Front Cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 For rear passengers, there are cupholders located on the STORAGE floor between the front driver and passenger seats. Glove Compartment The glove compartment is located on the right side of the instrument panel. Pull outward on the glove compartment latch to open the glove compartment. Push the glove compartment door upward to close it. Rear Cupholders Glove Compartment Latch 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CARGO AREA FEATURES The rear seatbacks have a fold down feature to allow increased cargo capacity. Push down the release button, located at the outboard top of the seatback and move the seatback to its foldeddown position to provide a flat load floor cargo area. When returning the seatback to its upright position, push rearward until the seatback is properly latched. Rear Seat Release Buttons UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located in the center of the instrument panel, below the radio. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster off, push the button a second time. Folded Rear Seats NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. 3 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS ! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ EVIC Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163 ! TURBO BOOST GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 ▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO . . . . . . . . . . .145 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 ▫ Change Engine Oil Indicator System . . . . . . . .165 ▫ Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Trip Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .148 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ! ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 ▫ Values Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ▫ EVIC Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169 4 142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ! SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ! iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . ▫ Suggestions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 ▫ CD Player Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 ▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone ▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188 (If Equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Functions And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 ! CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . ▫ SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped. . . . . .198 ! CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . . . . ▫ CD MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . ▫ Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 .208 .209 .209 .210 .210 .211 .211 .211 .214 .219 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 — — — — — — Side Vent Multifunction Lever – Light Control Instrument Cluster And Warning Lights Windshield Wiper, Washer, Trip Computer Central Air Vents Storage Compartment/Radio 7 — Passenger Air Bag 8 — Glove Compartment 9 — Rear Defrost Button 10 — Hazard Button 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Windows Control 13 14 15 16 17 — — — — — Storage Compartment Shift Lever Sport Button Horn/Driver Airbag Boost Gauge 144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL TURBO BOOST GAUGE Your vehicle is equipped with a boost gauge and integrated shift light indicator located to the left of the instrument cluster. The boost gauge indicates the intake manifold pressure relative to barometric pressure. The engine management system in your vehicle intelligently regulates intake manifold pressure based on environmental (ambient) and engine operating conditions. Turbo Boost Gauge 1 — Turbo Boost Gauge 2 — Shift Light Indicator UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — ECO 4 146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — POP, LOUNGE, 500C UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 4 148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to 1. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect Each tire, including the spare (if provided), the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should low tire pressure telltale. determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS tires.) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. approximately one minute and then remain continuously Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsenates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149 as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. CAUTION! 2. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. 3. Turn Signal Indicators The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated. 4 150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn problem diagnosed and corrected. signal on. NOTE: NOTE: • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a rapid rate. 4. Electronic Stability Control Malfunction Indicator Light (ESC) Activation/ The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151 beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver’s door is open, and the This light will turn on for four to eight seconds headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on sound. during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized 8. Seat Belt Reminder Light dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” When the ignition switch is first turned to in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to further information. eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb 5. Air Bag Warning Light check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, This indicator will illuminate when the park if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt lights or headlights are turned on. reminder light will flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. 7. High Beam Indicator 6. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped This light shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high 4 152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part soon as possible. of an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which monitors the emissions and engine conCAUTION! trol system. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light will come on when the ignition is first Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator turned on and remain on, as a bulb check, until the Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine engine is started. If the vehicle is not ready for emissions control system. It also could affect fuel economy and testing the light will come on when the ignition is first driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic turned on and remain on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 converter damage and power loss will soon occur. seconds, and remain on until the vehicle is started. If the Immediate service is required. bulb does not come on during starting, have the condition investigated promptly. 9. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it suggests a potential engine control problem and the need for system service. WARNING! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you (Continued) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153 WARNING! (Continued) drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. 10. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 11. Electric Power Steering Malfunction Warning Light This telltale is on when the Electric Power Steering is not operating and needs service. 12. Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on. 13. Rear Defrost Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 20 minutes. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 4 154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 14. Brake Warning Light The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155 WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. 15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock 4 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. 16. Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge/Turbo Gauge/ECO Index Gauge Depending on what options and trim level, your vehicle is equipped with there are three gauges available. • Gas Pedal Percentage Gauge: This gauge shows what percent the gas pedal is currently depressed at. • Turbo Gauge: This gauge shows the current turbo usage. • ECO Index Gauge: The ECO Index gauge allows the driver to monitor their driving style in order to increase fuel economy. The efficiency of the driving style is displayed on a gauge located on the right side of the instrument cluster and ranges from a minimum value of 0 up to a maximum value of 5 (0 = low, 5 = high). A higher “ECO” index indicates a more fuel efficient drive style and will increase your fuel economy. A lower “ECO” index indicates frequent accelerations/decelerations and will decrease your fuel economy. The index is recalculated approximately every second and takes into account a combination of the instant fuel economy and your driving style during the current trip. NOTE: Different trips may have different values even if the same driving style is maintained. Some factors that may impact the calculated index value are: • Traffic conditions • Trip duration • Temperature (engine and ambient) 17. Fuel Gauge Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 18. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) The EVIC features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 19. Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” Follow the warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap” paragraph. 4 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 20. Tachometer that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero. The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions Per Minute (RPM x 1000). NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic 21. Speedometer / Trip Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door” and “gate” and Information Center (EVIC) Display Area “Change Engine Oil” will only be displayed in the EVIC This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center been driven. (EVIC) in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of further information. vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the 22. Low Fuel Light correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your When the fuel level reaches approximately odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair 1.0 gallon (3.8L), this light will turn on, and technician should leave the odometer reading the same remain on until fuel is added. as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must 23. Generic Warning Light be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was The Generic Warning Light will illuminate if before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to any of the following conditions occur: Oil make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/ Change Request, Engine Oil Pressure Sensor service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 Failure, External Light Failure, Fuel Cut-Off Intervention, Refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Fuel Cut-Off Not Available, Parking Sensor Failure. Emergencies” if jump starting is required. 24. Cruise On Indicator — If Equipped This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON. Refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 25. Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer. 26. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain 4 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on 28. Engine Temperature Warning Light during starting, have the system checked by an authoThis light warns of an overheated engine condirized dealer. tion. The engine coolant temperature indicator 27. Oil Pressure Warning Light will illuminate and a single chime will sound after This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The reaching a set threshold. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Do In Emergencies” for further information. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) The EVIC consists of the following: • System Status The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. • Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) • Outside Temperature Display • Trip Computer Functions • Tire Pressure Monitoring Display Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display 4 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Door Ajar • Speed Limiter — If Equipped EVIC Displays 2. Amber Telltales • Ice Risk • Fuel Cut Off • Fuel Cut Off Failed • Hill Holder Failed • Oil Change Request • Check Lights • Vehicle Lock 3. Electronic Speed Control Active Instrument Cluster 1. Red Telltales (Left Bank) • Hood Ajar • Low Oil Pressure • Electronic Throttle Control 4. Amber Telltales • Generic Warning Light • Glow Plug Light • Park Sensor Failed • Stop Lamp Failed UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 5. Red Telltales (Right Bank) • Trunk Ajar • Transmission Failure • Battery Charge Indicator Push and release the UP button to scroll upward through the displayed menu and the related options or to increase the displayed value. 7. Shift Up or Down Indicators NOTE: UP and DOWN buttons activate different functions according to the following situations: 6. Exceeded Speed Limiter 8. Gear Indicator EVIC Control Buttons Push and release the DOWN button to scroll downward through the displayed menu and the related options or to decrease the value displayed. • To scroll the menu options upwards or downwards. Push and release the MENU button briefly to access the • To increase or decrease values during settings. EVIC. Push and hold the MENU button (approximately NOTE: When opening one of the front doors, the EVIC one second) to return to the main screen. display will turn on the clock and the miles or kilometers covered (for versions/markets, where provided) for a few seconds. 4 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup Menu • Speed Display • Autoclose The menu comprises a series of functions arranged in a • Units and DOWN butcycle. Push and release the UP tons to access the different options and settings • Language (setup). • Buzzer Volume The setup menu can be activated by pushing the MENU • Button Volume or DOWN butbutton. A single push on the UP tons will scroll through the setup menu options. The • Daylights (D.R.L.) menu includes the following functions: • Hill Start • Speed Beep • Trip B Data • Set Time • Set Date • See Radio • Tire Pressure • Unlock Driver Door First • Unlock All Doors • Exit Menu UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu Without 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select Submenu the displayed submenu option and to open the relevant setup menu. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to select or DOWN button (by the main menu option to set. 4. Push and release the UP single pushes) to select the new setting for this or DOWN button (by 2. Push and release the UP submenu option. single pushes) to select the new setting. 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to store the new setting and go back to the previously selected new setting and go back to the main menu option submenu option. previously selected. Selecting An Option Of The Main Menu With Sub- 6. Push and hold the MENU button to return to the main menu (short hold) or the main screen (longer hold). menu 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display Change Engine Oil Indicator System the first submenu option. Change Engine Oil or DOWN button (by Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change 2. Push and release the UP single pushes) to scroll through all the submenu indicator system. The “Change Engine Oil” message will options. flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds 4 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, push and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Trip Computer The Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as trip information, range, fuel consumption, average speed, and travel time). Trip Button The TRIP button, located on the right steering column 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (do not stalk, can be used to display and to reset the previously described values. start the engine.) 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal slowly, three times • A short button push displays the different values. within 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. • A long button push resets the system and then starts a new trip. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 New Trip Start Of Trip Procedure To reset: With the ignition on, push and hold the TRIP button for over one second to reset. • Push and hold the TRIP button to reset the system Exit Trip manually. • When the “Trip distance” reaches 9999.9 miles or kilometers or when the “Travel time” reaches 999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes), the system is reset automatically. To exit the Trip function, wait until all the values have been displayed or hold the MENU button for longer than one second. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to • Disconnecting/Reconnecting the battery resets the the menu screen or push and hold the MENU (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without system. storing settings. NOTE: If the reset operation occurs in the presence of the screens concerning Trip A or Trip B, only the information associated with Trip A or Trip B functions will be reset. 4 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Trip Functions • Average speed B Both trip functions are resettable (reset — start of new • Travel time B (driving time) trip). NOTE: “Trip B” functions may be excluded (see “Trip “Trip A” can be used to display the figures relating to: B Data”). “Range” and “Instantaneous consumption” cannot be reset. • Range • Trip distance A • Average economy • Instantaneous economy • Average speed A • Travel time A (driving time) “Trip B” can be used to display the figures relating to: • Trip distance B • Average economy Values Displayed Range This indicates the distance which may be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank, assuming that driving conditions will not change. The message “----” will appear on the display in the following cases: • Distance less than 30 miles (or 50 km). • The vehicle is parked for a long time with the engine running. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 NOTE: The range depends on several factors: driving Travel Time style, type of route (freeway, residential, mountain roads, This value shows the time elapsed since the last reset. etc.), conditions of use of the car (load, tire pressure, etc.). Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Trip planning must take into account the above notes. Features) Distance Traveled Dimmer This value shows the distance covered since the last reset. The EVIC display is provided with a light sensor capable Average Economy of detecting environmental light conditions and adjustThis value shows the approximate average consumption ing the brightness of the instruments accordingly. since the last reset. NOTE: The brightness of the instrument panel may Instant Economy change while travelling following an event that causes This indicates the fuel consumption. The value is con- switching from “day” to “night” conditions (or vice stantly updated. The message “----” will appear on the versa) in the passenger compartment (e.g. in a tunnel, on avenues in shadows, under bridges, etc.). display if the car is parked with the engine running. Average Speed To adjust the brightness, proceed as follows: or DOWN This value shows the vehicle’s average speed as a func- 1. Push and release the UP set the required brightness level. tion of the overall time elapsed since the last reset. button to 4 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. When the function is activated (On), briefly push and to the menu screen or push and hold the MENU release the MENU button to display the presently set or DOWN (approximately one second) to go back to the main activation speed. Pushing the UP buttons selects the speed limit. Push and release screen without storing settings. the MENU button to confirm selection. Speed Beep (Speed Limit) With this function, it is possible to set the car speed limit NOTE: The setting can be increased or decreased by (mph or km/h) to immediately alert the driver when the 5 mph or km/h each time the UP/DOWN button is pushed for speed settings above 20 mph (32 km/h). To set limit is exceeded. increase or decrease the set speed rapidly, push and hold To set the speed limit, proceed as follows: the UP/DOWN button. Save the setting by briefly push1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to enter the ing the button when you approach the required setting. Main MENU. • Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU or DOWN button to 2. Push and release the UP button (approximately one second) to go back to the select Speed Beep. Push and release the MENU main screen without storing the settings. or DOWN button, push and release the UP buttons to select Speed Limit activation (On) or deactivation (Off). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 To cancel the setting, proceed as follows: For activation / deactivation, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” will 1. flash on the display. 2. button. “Off” will 2. Push and release the DOWN flash on the display. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to or select Trip B data. Push and release the UP DOWN buttons to turn ON or OFF 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. main screen without storing the settings. Trip B Data (Trip B On) Set Time (Clock) Through this option, it is possible to activate (On) or This function may be used to set the clock through two deactivate (Off) the Trip B (partial trip) display. submenu items: “Time” and “Mode.” For further information, see “Trip Computer.” 4 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Proceed as follows: 7. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN buttons to highlight NOTE: release the UP Set Time — Push and release the MENU button. • The setting will increase or decrease by one unit each or DOWN button is pushed. time the UP 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to Push and hold the button to increase/decrease the navigate the two sub-menu items. setting rapidly. Save the setting by briefly pushing 3. Select the required option and then push and release the button when you approach the required setthe MENU button. ting. 4. When accessing the “Time” sub-menu item, briefly • Briefly push and release the MENU button to return push and release the MENU button and “hours” will to the “Time” sub-function. flash on the display. • When accessing the “Mode” submenu, briefly push or DOWN button for 5. Push and release the UP and release the MENU button. The previously set setting. display format will flash on the display. 6. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “minutes” will flash on the display. • Push and release the UP select “24h” or “12h.” or DOWN button to UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 When you have selected the required settings, briefly 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button and push and release the MENU button to go back to the “month” will flash on the display. Time, Mode sub-menu screen, or push and hold the or DOWN button for 4. Push and release the UP MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to setting. the main screen without storing the settings. 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button and “day” Set Date will flash on the display. This function may be used to set the date (day - month or DOWN button for 6. Push and release the UP year). setting. To change, the date proceed as follows: NOTE: The setting will increase or decrease by one unit 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and each time the UP or DOWN button is pushed. or DOWN button to highlight Push and hold the UP release the UP or DOWN button to Date, push and release the MENU button and Year increase/decrease the setting rapidly. Save the setting will begin to flash. by briefly pushing the button when you approach the 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for required setting. setting. • Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU 4 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL button (approximately one second) to go back to the 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back main screen without storing the settings. to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the See Radio (Repeat Audio Information) main screen without storing the settings. With this function active, the EVIC display shows inforIf the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate mation relevant to the sound system. “BLUE&ME™ Radio Supplement” for further informa• Radio: tuned radio station frequency, automatic tuning tion. activation or AutoStore. Speed Display • CD audio, CD MP3: track number. When this function is activated the cluster will display To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the sound system the vehicle speed (MPH or km/h). info displaying, proceed as follows: To activate (On) or to deactivate (Off) the speed display 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and feature, proceed as follows: or Down button to highlight release the UP 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and See Radio and push and release the MENU button. or DOWN button to highlight release the UP 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for Speed Display. Push and release the MENU button setting. to enter the Speed Display MENU. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to 2. Push and release the UP select display deactivation “Off”, “MPH” or “km/h.” setting. or DOWN button for 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen. main screen without storing the settings. Autoclose Units (Set Units) With this function active, the doors will automatically This function may be used to set the measurement unit in lock at when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph three submenus: “Distance,” “Temperature” and “Fuel (24 km/h). Economy, and Tire Pressure.” To change the setting proceed as follows: To set the required unit, proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push the 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight Autoclose. or DOWN button to highlight UP release the UP Push and release the MENU button to enter AutoUnits. Push and release the MENU button to enter close MENU. Units MENU. 4 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL or DOWN 2. Push and release the UP navigate the three sub-menus. button to If the distance unit set is “mi,” the fuel economy unit will be displayed in “mpg.” 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push If the distance unit set is “km,” the fuel economy unit will be displayed in either km/l or l/100km. and release the MENU button. or DOWN button for 4. When accessing the “Distance” submenu, briefly push 1. Push and release the UP setting. and release the MENU button. Either “mi” or “km” will appear on the display (according to the previous 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to setting). the sub-menu. or DOWN button for 5. Push and release the UP 3. When accessing the “Temperature” submenu: briefly setting. push and release the MENU button. Either “°F” or 6. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to “°C” will appear on the display (according to the the sub-menu. previous setting). or DOWN button for 7. When accessing the “Fuel Economy” submenu, briefly 4. Push and release the UP setting. push and release the MENU button. Either “mpg,” “km/l ” or “l/100km” will appear on the display 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to (according to the previous setting). the Tire Pressure — PSI/KPA sub-menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 When you have made the required settings, briefly push 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxibutton (approximately one second) to go back to the mately one second) to go back to the main screen without main screen without storing the settings. storing the settings. Buzzer Volume (Adjusting The Failure/Warning Language (Selecting The Language) Buzzer Volume) The messages can be displayed in the following lan- With this function the volume of the buzzer accompanyguages: Italian, English, Turkce, Nederlands, Spanish, ing any failure/warning indication can be adjusted to French, Dutch, Polish, Brasilian. one of eight volume levels. To set the required language, proceed as follows: To adjust the volume proceed as follows: 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight or DOWN button, then highrelease the UP release the UP Language. Push and release the MENU button to light the Buzzer Volume. Push and release the enter the Language MENU. MENU button to enter the Buzzer Volume MENU. 2. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for 2. Push and release the UP setting. or DOWN button for 4 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU to the menu screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approximately one second) to go back to the button (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. main screen without storing the settings. Button Volume (Button Volume Adjustment) Belt Buzzer (Buzzer Activation For S.B.R. This function may be used to adjust the volume of the Indication) beep accompanying the buttons. MENU, UP or This function will only be displayed after a FIAT Group buttons can be adjusted according to 8 Automobiles dealership has deactivated the S.B.R. sysDOWN levels. tem. To adjust the volume, proceed as follows: Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and This function may be used to activate / deactivate the or DOWN button to highlight Daytime Running Lamps. release the UP the Buzzer Volume, push and release the MENU Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: button. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for or DOWN button to highlight release the Up setting. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL). Push and release the MENU button to enter the DRL MENU. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 2. Briefly push and release the MENU button. “On” or • Fuel Econ Off – the fuel economy upshift light is disabled. “Off” will flash on the display (according to previous setting). To set the required unit, proceed as follows: or DOWN button for 3. Push and release the UP 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button to display setting. the two sub-menus. 4. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to to the menu screen, or push and hold the button navigate the two sub-menus. (approximately one second) to go back to the main 3. Select the required sub-menu and then briefly push screen without storing the settings. and release the MENU button. GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) or DOWN button for This function may be used to set the Gear Shift Indicator 4. Push and release the UP setting. in two submenus: “Fuel Econ On” and “Fuel Econ Off.” 5. Briefly push and release the MENU button to return to • Fuel Econ On – turns on a fuel economy upshift light the sub-menu. in the instrument cluster, for optimum fuel economy, when operating in base driving mode. When you have made the required settings, briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to the sub-menu 4 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL screen, or push and hold the MENU button (approxi- 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back mately one second) to go back to the main screen without to the menu screen, or push and hold the button storing the settings. (approximately one second) to go back to the main screen without storing the settings. Hill Start Assist This function is used when starting a vehicle from a stop Tire Pressure on a hill. Hill Start Assist maintains the same level of This function will be used to display the tire pressures brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of individually for all four tires by location. time after the foot has been removed from the brake Proceed as follows: pedal. 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and Proceed as follows to switch this function on or off: or DOWN button to highlight release the UP the Tire Pressure. Push and release the MENU 1. Briefly push and release the MENU button. Push and or DOWN button to highlight button to enter the Tire Pressure MENU. release the UP the Hill Start Assist. Push and release the MENU 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button to scroll button to enter the Hill Start Assist MENU. through all four tire pressure value locations. 2. Push and release the UP or DOWN button for setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 3. Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back Exit Menu to the menu screen, or push and hold the button This function closes the initial menu screen. (approximately one second) to go back to the main Briefly push and release the MENU button to go back to screen. the main screen. Lock button to return to the first Push and release the When Unlock Driver Door is selected, only the driver’s menu option (Speed Beep). door will unlock on the first push of the Remote Keyless button to return to the last Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Push and release the Drivers Door is selected, you must push the RKE trans- menu option (Daylights). mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger door. When All Doors is selected, both of the doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, push and release the SELECT button until “Unlock Driver Door” or “All Doors” appears. 4 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SALES CODE (RAB) RADIO If the radio has BLUE&ME™, refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The instructions for use are given below and we recommend you to read them carefully. Suggestions Road Safety Please, learn how to use all different radio functions (e.g. store stations) before beginning to drive. Reception Conditions RAB Radio Introduction The radio has been designed according to the specifications of the passenger compartment, with a personalized design to match the style of the dashboard. Reception conditions change constantly while driving. Reception may be interfered with by the presence of mountains, buildings or bridges, or when you are far away from the broadcaster. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 WARNING! Having the volume turned up high can cause the driver to not be able to hear important traffic sounds, i.e. sirens, horns, etc. Failure to hear traffic sounds and other important audible information can result in serious injury or death. Always adjust the volume so that you can still hear background noises. Care And Maintenance Clean the cover with a soft antistatic cloth only. Cleaning and polishing products could damage the surface. CDs • Clean every CD thoroughly removing any finger marks or dust using a soft cloth. Hold CDs by the outside and clean them from the middle outwards. • Never use chemicals (e.g. antistatics or thinners or sprays) for cleaning as they could damage the surface of the CDs. • After listening to them place CDs back in their boxes to prevent them from being damaged. • Do not expose CDs to direct sunlight, high temperatures or moisture for long periods. • Do not stick labels on the CD surface or write on the recorded surface with pencils or pens. The presence of dirt, scratches or distortions on the CDs • Do not use CDs that are very scratched, flawed, could cause skipping and poor sound quality while it is distorted, etc. Using discs like these will result in playing. For optimal playback conditions, follow these malfunctions or damage to the player. guidelines: • Only use branded CDs. 4 184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • The use of original CD media is required for the best • The CD player is capable of reading most compression quality audio production. Correct operation is not systems currently in use, following the development of guaranteed when CD-R/RW media are used that were these systems, the reading of all compression formats not correctly burned and/or with a maximum capacity is not guaranteed. above 650 Mb. Technical Specifications • Do not use commercially available protective sheets The complete system consists of: for CDs or discs, with stabilizers, etc. as they could get stuck in the internal mechanism and damage the disc. • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers, one speaker in each of the front doors. • If a copy-protected CD is used, it may take a few seconds before the system starts to play it. The CD • Two 22 mm diameter tweeter speakers, one speaker in each of the front pillars. player cannot be guaranteed to play all protected discs. The fact that the CD is protected from being • Two 100 mm diameter full range speakers, one speaker copied is often shown in very small letters or is in each of the rear side panels. difficult to read on the actual CD cover where it may be, for example, “COPY CONTROL,” “COPY PRO- • Antenna on the car roof. TECTED,” “THIS CD CANNOT BE PLAYED ON A • Radio with CD/MP3 player. PC/MAC.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 With Alpine Premium Audio system (if equipped): • Two 165 mm diameter midwoofer speakers. • Two 11 mm tweeter speakers in the front pillars. • Antenna on the car roof. • Radio with CD/MP3 player. With BEATS Premium Audio system (if equipped): • Two 100 mm full range speakers, one speaker in each • A subwoofer in the trunk on the left-hand side panel. of the rear side panels. • An amplifier in the trunk on the right-hand side panel. Quick Guide Radio Controls BUTTON TUNER GENERAL FUNCTIONS On Off AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) source selection MODE Short button push Short button push Short repeated button push 4 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON A-B-C MEDIA BUTTON (Mute/Pause Button) AUDIO (Information Button) GENERAL FUNCTIONS Cycles A, B, C presets for AM, FM, SAT (if equipped) CD/AUX/Media Player (if equipped and present) source selection MODE Short repeated button push Short repeated button push GENERAL FUNCTIONS Volume activation/deactivation (Mute/Pause) MODE Short button push Audio adjustments: low tones (BASS), high tones (TREBLE), left/ right balance (BALANCE), front/ rear balance (FADER) Song, Artist, Album, Genre, Playlist, Folder information (if available) in CD, Media Player and Satellite (if so equipped); Toggles RBDS information in FM Menu activation: short button push or Adjustment type selection: push Adjustment of values: push or UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 BUTTON MENU GENERAL FUNCTIONS Advanced functions adjustment +Vol/–Vol Volume adjustment MODE Menu activation: short button push or Adjustment type selection: push Adjustment of values: push or Push + button: volume increase Push – button: volume decrease BUTTON RADIO FUNCTIONS Radio Station Search: • Automatic Search • Manual Search 12345 Current radio station storing Stored station recall MODE Automatic search: push buttons or (long push for fast forward) Manual search: push buttons or (long push for fast forward) Long button push for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively Short button push for memory preset 1 to 5 respectively 4 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BUTTON CD FUNCTIONS CD ejection Previous/next track play CD track fast forward/rewind Previous/next folder play (for CDMP3) General Information The radio offers the following functions: Radio Section • PLL tuning with FM/AM bands • RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) • Automatic/manual station tuning • FM Multipath detector MODE Short button push Short button push Long button push Short button push or or or • Manual storing of 25 stations (base radio) and 40 stations (if equipped with Satellite): 15 on FM band (5 on FMA, 5 on FMB, 5 on FMC), 10 on AM band (5 on AMA, 5 on AMB), 15 on Satellite Band - if equipped (5 on SATA, 5 on SATB, 5 on SATC) • SPEED VOLUME function: Customer selectable automatic volume adjustment depending on the car speed • Automatic Stereo/Mono selection UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 CD Section • Track selection (forward/backward) • Track selection (forward/backward) • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • MP3 Display function: display of folder name, ID3TAG information, time elapsed since the start of the • CD Display function: display of track number and on track, name of the file mp3 discs (song title, artist) and time elapsed since • Playing audio or data CD, CD-R and CD-RW start of the track • Fast forward/rewind through tracks • Playing Audio CD, CD-R and CD-RW CAUTION! On multimedia CDs, besides audio tracks, there are data tracks too. Playing this type of CD could cause hissing at a volume that could damage the speakers. CD/MP3 Section • MP3-Info function (ID3-TAG) • Folder selection (previous/next) Audio Section • Mute/pause function • Soft mute function • Loudness function • Graphic 7 band equalizer (if equipped) • Separate bass/treble tone adjustment • Right/left channel balancing • Front/rear fader 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Functions And Adjustments Selecting The CD Function Turning The Car Radio On By briefly pushing the MEDIA button, the CD audio source can be selected (only if a CD is loaded). The car radio comes on when the is pushed briefly. (ON/OFF) button Volume Adjustment When the car radio is turned on and the on volume limit To adjust the volume, push the buttons +Vol or –Vol to is on, the volume is limited to a setting of five even if it increase/decrease the volume. had been set higher when previously used. Mute/Pause Function Turning The Car Radio Off Push the button briefly to activate the MUTE funcPush the (ON/OFF) button to turn the radio off. Selecting The Radio Functions tion. The volume will gradually decrease and the wording “TUNER Mute” will be shown on the display (in radio mode) or “CD Pause” (in CD mode). By pushing the TUNER button briefly and repeatedly, the Push the button again to deactivate the MUTE following audio sources can be selected cyclically: function. The volume will gradually increase until it • AM, FM and Satellite Bands (if equipped) reaches the previously set level. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 When the volume level is changed using the dedicated The functions managed by the Audio Menu are: controls, the Mute function is deactivated and the vol• BASS (Bass adjustment) ume is adjusted to the new level selected. • MIDRANGE (Midrange adjustment) Audio Adjustment • TREBLE (Treble adjustment) The functions that can be selected from the audio menu change depending on the context: AM/FM/MEDIA/ • BALANCE (right/left Balance adjustment) SATELLITE. • FADER (front/rear Balance adjustment) Push the AUDIO button briefly to change the Audio • LOUDNESS — if equipped (Loudness function functions. After the AUDIO button is first pushed, the activation/deactivation) display will show the Bass level value for the source activated at that time (e.g. in FM mode the display will • EQUALIZER — if equipped (activation and selection show the wording “FM Bass +2”). of factory equalization adjustments) or to scroll through the Menu • USER EQUALIZER — if equipped (customized equalUse the buttons functions. To change the setting of the selected funcization adjustment) or buttons. tion, use the The current status of the selected function appears on the display. 4 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tone Adjustment Proceed as follows: 1. Push the AUDIO button. button to increase the sound from the 3. Push the left speakers or the button to increase the sound from the right speakers. By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will or button to select “Bass,” “Mid- change progressively. By pushing them down longer, 2. Push the range” or “Treble” in the AUDIO menu. the levels will change quickly. 3. Push the or button to increase/decrease the Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs bass or treble adjustments. at the same level. By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will Fader Adjustment change progressively. By pushing them down longer, Proceed as follows: the levels will change quickly. 1. Push the AUDIO button. Balance Adjustment or button to set “Fader” in the 2. Push the Proceed as follows: AUDIO menu. 1. Push the AUDIO button. 3. Push the button to increase the sound coming or button to set “Balance” in the 2. Push the button to increase from the rear speakers or the AUDIO menu. the sound coming from the front speakers. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 By pushing the or buttons briefly, the levels will Preset/User/Classic/Rock/Jazz Functions — If change progressively. By pushing them down longer, Equipped the levels will change quickly. The built-in equalizer can be activated/deactivated. Select the value “0” to set the right and left audio outputs When the equalizer function is off, the audio settings can only be changed by adjusting the “Bass” and “Treble” at the same level. settings, whereas when the function is on, the acoustic Loudness Function — If Equipped curves can be adjusted. To deactivate the equalizer, select The Loudness function improves the volume of the the “EQ Preset” function in the audio menu. sound while listening at low volumes, increasing the bass To activate the equalizer, use the AUDIO button to select and treble. one of the adjustments: To activate/deactivate this function, select the “Loud• “EQ User” (adjustment of 7 equalizer bands that can ness” setting in the AUDIO menu. The condition of the be changed by the user) function (on or off) is shown on the display for a few seconds by the wording “Loudness On” or “Loudness • “Classic” (equalizer preset for optimal classic music Off”. sound) 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • “Rock” (equalizer preset for optimal rock and pop 5. On the display a seven bar graph will appear, in which each bar represents a frequency. Select the bar to be music sound) adjusted by using the or buttons. The selected • “Jazz” (equalizer preset for optimal jazz music sound) bar will start to flash and it can be adjusted using or buttons. When one of the equalizer adjustments is activated the wording “EQ” lights up. 6. To store the setting, push the MENU or AUDIO User EQ Settings Function — If Equipped buttons. To set a personalized equalizer adjustment: Menu 1. Push the AUDIO button. MENU Button Functions or 2. Use the 3. Use or buttons to set EQ function. buttons to select #EQ User.# 4. Push the MENU button to start adjusting equalizer. Push the MENU button briefly to activate the Menu function. or buttons to scroll through the menu Use the functions. To change the setting of the selected funcor buttons. tion, use the The current status of the selected function appears on the display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 • Speech Volume inside the passenger compartment. To activate/ deactivate the function, use the buttons. The wording “Speed volume” appears on the display, followed by the current status of the function: • Radio Off • Off: function deactivated • SiriusXM Telephone Number • High: function activated (high sensitivity) The functions managed by the Menu are: • Aux Audio Offset • Sat ID • System Reset • Speed Volume • On Volume Limit Push the MENU button again to exit the Menu function. • Low: function activated (low sensitivity) On Volume Limit This function makes it possible to activate/deactivate the maximum volume limit when turning the radio on. The display shows the function status: • “On volume limit: on” – when the radio is turned on the volume level will be: This function automatically adapts the volume level to – If the volume level is equal to or higher than the the speed of the car, turning up the volume when the maximum value, the radio will come on at the speed increases to maintain the ratio with the noise level maximum volume. Speed Volume Function — If Equipped 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL – If the volume level is between the minimum and maximum values, the radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off. – If the volume level is equal to or lower than the minimum value, the radio will come on at the minimum volume. • “On volume limit: off” – The radio will come on at the same volume as before it was switched off. The volume level can be between 0 and 40. Radio Off Function This function makes it possible to set the radio switching off mode by choosing between two methods. The chosen mode appears on the display: • “Radio off: 00 min” — The radio turns off in connection with the ignition key; the radio is turned automatically off as soon as the key is turned to the STOP position. • “Radio off: 20 min” — The radio turns off independently from the ignition key; the radio remains on for NOTE: a maximum period of 20 minutes after the key has been turned to the STOP position. • Using the Menu it is only possible to adjust the activation/deactivation of the function and not the System Reset Function minimum or maximum volume value. This function is used to restore all settings to the factory • If the battery charge is too low, the volume cannot be values. The options are: adjusted between the minimum and the maximum • NO — No restore intervention. level. Use the buttons or to change the setting. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 • YES — The default parameters will be restored. During such operation, the wording “Resetting” appears on the display. At the end of the operation, the source does not change and the previous situation will be displayed. Radio (Tuner) Introduction Frequency Band Selection With the Radio mode active, press the FM or AM tuner button briefly and repeatedly to select the desired reception band. Each time the button is pressed the following bands are selected cyclically: • AM, FM or SAT (if equipped) When the car radio is turned on, the last function that Each band is highlighted by the corresponding wordings was selected before turning it off (Radio, CD, CD MP3, on the display. The radio will be tuned to last station AUX) is activated. selected on the respective frequency band. To select the Radio function when another audio source is Preset Buttons being listened to, briefly push the TUNER button. The buttons numbered from 1 to 5 are used to set the Once the Radio mode has been activated, the display will following pre-selections: show the name (RBDS stations only) or the frequency of the selected radio station, the frequency band selected • 15 in the FM band (5 in FMA, 5 in FMB, 5 in FMC) (e.g. FMA) and the preset button number (e.g. P1). • 10 in the AM band (5 in AMA, 5 in AMB) 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • 15 in SAT (if so equipped) (5 SATA, 5 SATB, 5 SATC) Manual Tuning Automatic Tuning Stereophonic Broadcasters To listen to a preset station, select the desired frequency This is used to manually search for stations in the band and then briefly push the corresponding preset preselected band. button (from 1 to 5). Select the desired frequency band and then push briefly or button to start the search in By pushing the preset button for more than two seconds, and repeatedly the or button is pushed the tuned station will be stored. Pushing the A-B-C the desired direction. If the button will change between the preset memory group in longer, the fast search starts and then stops when the button is released. the current frequency band. Briefly push the or button to start the automatic If the incoming signal is weak, the reproduction is tuning search for the next station that can be received automatically switched from Stereo to Mono. in the selected direction. SiriusXM Satellite Radio — If Equipped If the or button is pushed for longer, the rapid Satellite Radio Antenna — If Equipped search is started. When the button is released, the tuner will stop on the next station that can be received. The antenna for the satellite radio is mounted on the roof of the vehicle. Do not place items on the roof around the roof top antenna location. Objects placed within the line UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be placed as far from the antenna as possible. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna. SiriusXM Satellite Radio With over 130 channels, SiriusXM Satellite Radio brings you more of what you love. Get 69 channels of 100% commercial-free music, plus all of your favorite sports, news, talk and entertainment. Hear every NFL game, every NASCAR race, college sports and more. The biggest and most compelling names in talk with Howard Stern and Martha Stewart, laugh-out-loud comedy with Jamie Foxx’s The Foxxhole and Blue Collar Comedy, plus kids’ programming, world-class news, local traffic and weather. All of this with crystal clear, coast-to-coast coverage. Everything worth listening to is now on SiriusXM. A one-year SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription is included. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at www.siriusxm.com/customeragreement. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., and PR. Service available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Program Types Program Types can be selected by pushing the or buttons. The Program Type will change to the next category and the radio will then tune to first station in or buttons will tune that program type. Pushing to only the stations in that program type. or buttons until #All# is displayed Pushing the will allow normal tuning to all stations. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Write down the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) for your receiver. To retrieve the Electronic Serial Number of SiriusXM Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly, then the SiriusXM subscription will not be able You can find the SiriusXM current terms and conditions to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active at www.siriusxm.com. when installed in the customer’s vehicle. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the display Re-Subscribe To SiriusXM Satellite Radio or visit the provider online. New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio CAUTION! with their radio. Following expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Neither SIRIUS nor FIAT is responsible for any Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe. errors in accuracies in the SIRIUS data services or its Press the UP/DOWN button to scroll through the Menu use in vehicles. Functions, and the Left/Right button to change the selected Set-up Menu function. The Program Types available are: All, Pop, Rock, Electronic/Dance, Hip-Hop/R&B, Country, Christian, Jazz/Standards, Classical, Latin/World, Sports, Entertainment, Talk, News, NPR, Comedy, Family & Health, Religion, Traffic/Weather. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. SiriusXM Radio requires a subscription, sold separately after trial subscription included with vehicle purchase. Prices and programming are provided by SiriusXM and are subject to change. Subscriptions governed by Terms & Conditions available at www.siriusxm.com/customeragreement. SiriusXM Radio U.S. service only available to those at least 18 years of age in the 48 contiguous United States, D.C., & PR. www.siriusxm.com. Sirius Subscription Issues When Replacing A Sirius Radio When a radio needs to be replaced, the Dealer will need the SIRIUS information to order a new radio (even if the SIRIUS subscription has lapsed). The ESN number contains 12 digits. The following are instructions for retrieving the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from FIAT 500 NAFTA model radios: To retrieve the ESN of SIRIUS Satellite Receiver Module tune to Channel 0. Make sure that when the order is placed, the ESN are correct. If any of the ESN numbers are not entered correctly, then the SIRIUS subscription will not be able to be transferred to the new radio and will not be active when installed in the customer’s vehicle. CD Player Introduction This chapter describes the operation of the CD player only. To operate the radio, refer to the description in the “Functions and Adjustments” chapter. 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CD Player Selection CD Loading/Ejecting To activate the CD player built into the equipment, To load the CD, insert it gently into the slot to activate the proceed as follows: motorized loading system, which will position it correctly. • Load a CD with the equipment switched on. The first track will start to play. The CD can be loaded with the radio off and the ignition key turned to ON/RUN. In this case, the radio will Or remain off. When the radio is turned on, the last source • If a CD has already been loaded, turn on the radio and listened to before being switched off, will be activated. then briefly push the MEDIA button to select the “CD” When a CD is inserted, the display will show the symbol function mode. The last track listened to will start to “CD” and the wording “CD Reading.” They will remain play. displayed for the whole time required for the radio to It is advisable to use original CDs to ensure optimal read the CD. When this time has elapsed the radio playing. If CD-R/RWs are used, we recommend using automatically starts playing the first track. good quality media that are burned at the slowest speed button with the radio turned on, to Push the possible. activate the motorized CD ejection system. After ejection, the last audio source listened to before playing the CD will be heard. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 If the CD is not removed from the radio, it will automatically be reloaded about 20 seconds later but will not resume playing until the #MEDIA# button is pushed to select the CD mode. The radio will switch to the last source prior to CD mode. Display Information The CD cannot be ejected if the radio is off. • “03:42” indicates the time elapsed since the start of the track (if the relevant Menu function is activated). Possible Error Messages When the CD player is operating, information will appear on the display with the following meaning: • “Track 5” indicates the CD track number. Track Selection If the loaded CD cannot be read (e.g. a CD ROM has been button to play the previous CD inserted or the CD is inserted the wrong way or there is Briefly push the button to play the next track. The a reading error) the display shows the wording “CD Disc track and the tracks are selected cyclically: the first track is selected error.” after the last track and vice versa. The CD will then be ejected and the audio source If the track has been played for more than 3 seconds, activated before the CD mode selection will be heard. button, starts the track again from the pushing the A CD which cannot be read will not be ejected until these beginning. In this case, if you want to play the functions are over. At the end, with the CD mode previous track, push the button twice consecuactivated, the display will show the wording “CD Disc tively. error” for a few seconds and then the CD will be ejected. 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Track Fast Forward/Rewind MP3 Mode Keep the button pushed down to fast forward the In addition to playing regular audio CDs, the radio is also button pushed down to enabled to play CDROMs on which compressed audio selected track and keep the fast rewind the track. The fast forward/rewind will files have been recorded in an MP3 format. stop once the button is released. To guarantee optimal reproduction, it is advisable to use Pause Function good quality CDs burned at the lowest speed possible. To pause the CD player, push the button. The word- The files on an MP3 CD are structured in folders that ing “CD Pause” appears on the display. create lists of all the folders containing MP3 tracks (folders or subfolders are all on the same level). The To resume listening to the track, push the button folders that do not contain MP3 tracks cannot be selected. again. The specifications and operating conditions for playing CD MP3 Player MP3 files are the following: Introduction • The CD-ROMs used should be burned in accordance This chapter describes the operation of the CD MP3 player. • NOTE: Layer-3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia. with ISO standard 9660. The music files should have the extension “.mp3” or “.wma” files with a different extension will not be reproduced. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 • The sampling frequencies that can be reproduced are: NOTE: When the function is activated the radio may take 44.1 kHz, stereo (from 96 to 320 kbit/s) – 22.05 kHz, a few seconds to start playing. While checking the disc the display will show “CD Reading.” If no MP3 files are mono or stereo (from 32 to 80 kbit/s). detected, the radio will resume playing the audio session • Tracks with a variable bit-rate can be reproduced. from the point where it was interrupted. NOTE: The track names must not include the following Display Information characters: spaces, ‘ (apostrophes), ( and ) (open and close brackets). During the burning of a MP3 CD, make sure ID3–Tag Information Display that the names of the files do not contain these characters; In addition to the information relating to the time if not, the radio will not be able to play the tracks elapsed, folder name and file name, the radio is also involved. capable of displaying ID3–TAG information relating to Selecting MP3 Sessions With Hybrid Discs Title Track, Artist and Author. If a hybrid disc is inserted (Mixed Mode, Enhanced, CD-Extra) also containing MP3 files, the radio automatically starts playing the audio session. It is possible to move to the MP3 session while playing by keeping the CD button pressed for more than two seconds. When one of the ID3-TAG pieces of information is chosen to be displayed (Title, Artist, Album) and this information has not been recorded for the track played, the text #UNKNOWN# will be displayed for that field. 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • If the MP3 files on a CD-ROM are structured in sub-folders their structure is compressed to a single Push the button to select a next folder or the level structure, where the sub-folders are taken to the button to select the previous folder. The display level of the main folders. will show the number of the folder. The folders are selected cyclically. The first folder is Troubleshooting Selection Of Next/Previous Folder selected after the last folder and vice versa. General If no other folder/track is selected in the next two Sound Volume Low seconds, the first track on the new folder will be played. The Fader function should be adjusted to the values “F” After the last track in a folder is played, the next folder (front) only to prevent the reduction in radio output power and the cancelling of the volume if the Fader level will be played. adjustment is equal to R+9. Structure Of The Folders Source Can Not Be Selected The radio with MP3 player: • Recognizes only the folders that effectively contain Nothing has been loaded. Load the CD or the MP3 CD to be listened to. MP3 format files. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 CD Player Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone The CD Does Not Play: The CD is dirty. Clean the CD. Refer to the appropriate “BLUE&ME™ User’s Manual” for further information. The CD is scratched. Try using another CD. Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) The CD Can Not Be Loaded: A CD is already loaded. Press the the CD. A Personal/Portable Navigation Device (PND) is available as optional equipment for this vehicle, refer to the button and remove Navigation User Guide for further information. MP3 File Reading Track Skips While Playing Mp3 Files: iPod®/USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be plugged into the USB or AUX port, located in the center The Duration Of The Mp3 Tracks Is Not Correctly console. Displayed: The CD is scratched or dirty. In some cases (due to the recording mode) the duration of the MP3 tracks can be displayed incorrectly. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. USB/AUX Port 1 — Auxiliary Cable Jack 2 — USB Connector Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ radio User’s Manual for iPod® or external USB device support capability. Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left-hand control Pushing the center button will make the radio switch will tune to the next preset station that you have probetween the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/ grammed in the radio preset button. CD/AUX/Media Player, etc.) and can also be used to CD Player Operation select/enter an item while scrolling through menu. The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once control is different depending on which mode you are in. will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second The following describes the left-hand control operation in after the current track begins to play. each mode. If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track; three times, it will play the third, etc. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Instructions — Hands-Free Phone (If Equipped) 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. Refer to the appropriate Blue&Me™ User’s Manual for 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. further information. 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions: NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) surface. oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, good disc before considering disc player service. wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Manual Heating And Air Conditioning Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation. 4 CLIMATE CONTROLS The air conditioning and heating system is designed to make you comfortable in all types of weather. Manual Temperature Control (MTC) The Manual Climate controls consist of a series of rotary dials and one inner push knob. 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1. Temperature Control Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial to the left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating to the right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures. 2. Blower Control Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right from the “0” (OFF) position. There are four blower speeds. 3. Recirculation Control NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Rotate this control to change the system between recir- 4. Mode Control culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be Rotate this control to change the system between Modes used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, (Panel, Bi-Level, Floor, Mix, Defrost). dust, or high humidity are present. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 • Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow. NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear. • Bi-Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. • Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demister outlets. • Mix Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. • Defrost Air is directed through the windshield and side window demister outlets. Use this mode with maximum blower and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting. NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix or Defrost, even if the Air Conditioning (A/C) button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary. 5. A/C Button Push this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL MAX A/C For maximum cooling, use the A/C and recirculation modes at the same time. ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then, move the temperature control to the desired temperature. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows the occupant to select a comfort settings. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) • The system provides set-and-forget operation for op- 1. AUTO Temperature Control (ATC) Button timum comfort and convenience. Controls airflow, temperature, distribution, and air recir• The system can be controlled manually, if desired. culation automatically. Push and release to select. PerThe ATC system automatically maintains the interior forming this function will cause the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to comfort level desired by the occupant. “Automatic Operation” for more information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Push and release to change the current Air Conditioning AUTO mode. (A/C) setting. Performing this function will cause the The operator can also select the direction of the airflow ATC to switch into manual mode. by selecting one of the following positions. 3. Temperature Control Up Button 5. Mix Mode Provides temperature up control. Push the button for Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side warmer temperature settings. window demister outlets. This setting works best 4. Blower Control Up/Down Buttons in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the There are 12 fixed blower speeds. The blower control windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort up/down buttons regulate the amount of air forced while reducing moisture on the windshield. Performing through the system in any mode you select. The blower this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual speed increases as you push, or hold, the blower control mode. up button and decreases when you push, or hold, the 6. Front Defrost blower control down button. Push and release to change the current airflow The blower fan speed may be set to any fixed speed by setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates pushing the blower control up or down buttons. The fan when this feature is ON. Air comes from the windshield will now operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds 2. A/C Button 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL and side window demist outlets. When the defrost but- NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed ton is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers mode with maximum temperature settings for best wind- for maximum airflow to the rear. shield and side window defrosting and defogging. Per9. Bi-Level forming this function will cause the ATC to switch into Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets. manual mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the Press and release the Panel mode button and Floor climate system will return the previous setting. mode button to enter Bi-Level mode, the indicators 7. Floor Mode illuminate when ON. Performing this function will cause Air is directed through the floor outlets with a the ATC to switch into manual mode. small amount flowing through the defrost and 10. Temperature Control Down Button side window demister outlets. Performing this function Provides temperature down control. Push the button for will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. cooler temperature settings. 8. Panel Mode NOTE: If the temperature is lowered until #Lo# is disAir is directed through the outlets in the instruplayed, all high voltage Heating, Ventilation, and Air ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct Conditioning (HVAC) systems are deactivated and amairflow. Performing this function will cause the ATC to bient air is circulated according to the Heating, Ventilaswitch into manual mode. tion, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) control settings. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 outlets. If Economy mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and Push and release to turn the Climate Control ON or OFF. deactivate the A/C system. 12. Recirculation Control Button NOTE: Push and release to change the current setting. The • If the system is in Mix or Defrost Mode, the A/C can indicator illuminates when ON. be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain active NOTE: When in Defrost mode, the Recirculation button to prevent fogging of the windows. will flash if pushed. This indicates that you can not • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, proceed to this mode due to fogging risk. select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if Climate Control Functions needed. 11. Climate Control ON/OFF Button Air Conditioning (A/C) Recirculation Control The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When in A/C mode with the ATC set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pushing the RECIRCULATION control button. Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate when 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL this button is selected. Push the button a second time to 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain by adjusting the temperature conturn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside trol buttons. Once the desired temperature is disair into the vehicle. played, the system will achieve and automatically NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may maintain that comfort level. lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (indicator light shall blink) if 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will expericonditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Consystem to function automatically. trols, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recircula- NOTE: tion will be disabled automatically if this mode is se• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for lected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide and then turn off. comfort as quickly as possible. Automatic Operation • The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable 1. Push the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information Control (ATC) Panel, the indicator will illuminate Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features” when on. in this section of the manual. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Manual Operation Window Fogging The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool trol. temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases, turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort. a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This allows the front occupants to control the volume of air As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode. direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher The operator can also select the direction of the airflow blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the operation and Recirculation control can also be manually Defrost mode. selected in Manual operation. Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a Operating Tips non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette suggested control settings for various weather condi- smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. tions. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging. 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield. When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable. Summer Operation NOTE: In some cases during high temperature operation, the air conditioning system performance may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from overheating during the high load condition. Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an automatic recirculation system. When the system senses a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort while in automatic mode. Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions. Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air using the high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the air conditioning system is started again. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Operating Tips Chart 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS ! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ▫ Five-Speed Manual Transmission. . . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .227 ▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .227 ▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 ▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 ! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Extended Park Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 ▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . ▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Turbocharger “Cool Down” . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 ! AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .230 . . .233 . . .234 . . .235 . . .235 . . .236 . . .242 5 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 ! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .252 ! DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . .252 ▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .254 ! DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .256 ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 ▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 ! POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 ! PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 ! SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .250 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .251 ! BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 ! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .264 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .266 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .267 STARTING AND OPERATING 225 ! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .272 ! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .284 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 ! TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .275 ▫ Premium TPM System . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276 ! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .284 . . . . .286 . . . . .288 . . . . .291 . . . . .295 . . . . .295 . . . . .296 . . . . .296 . . . . .296 . . . . .297 . . . . .297 . . . . .298 5 226 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .299 ! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 ! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 ▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .302 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .301 STARTING AND OPERATING 227 STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission — If Equipped Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUinside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts. TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch WARNING! pedal is pressed to the floor. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with Automatic Transmission — If Equipped access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or position before you can start the engine. Depress the others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil- brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear. dren should be warned not to touch the parking NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or out of PARK. in a location accessible to children). A child could Normal Starting operate power windows, other controls, or move NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm the vehicle. engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. 5 228 STARTING AND OPERATING Turn the ignition switch to the AVV/ACC (START) position and release it when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Cold Weather Operation To prevent possible engine damage while starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the ambient temperature is less than –22° F (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor reading indicates an engine block heater has not been used. An externallypowered electric engine block heater is available as optional equipment or from your authorized dealer. The message “plug in engine heater” will be displayed in the instrument cluster when the ambient temperature is below 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is shut off as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at the next cold start. CAUTION! Use of the recommended SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil and adhering to the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and ensure satisfactory starting in cold conditions. Extended Park Starting NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle has not been started or driven for at least 35 days. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle. 2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it when the engine starts. STARTING AND OPERATING 229 3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the If Engine Fails To Start ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the WARNING! Extended Park Starting procedure. Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the 4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing the procedure. serious personal injury. CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. CAUTION! • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. 5 230 STARTING AND OPERATING After Starting MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine Five-Speed Manual Transmission warms up. Turbocharger “Cool Down” This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet operation, it is normal to hear it running during this time. WARNING! You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. STARTING AND OPERATING 231 Use each gear in numerical order; do not skip a gear. Be sure the transmission is in first gear, not third, when starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result from starting in third gear. For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light accelerations, fifth gear is recommended. Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch. Shift Lever Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you complete stop. release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lupedal. bricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission. 5 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Recommended Shift Speeds Downshifting To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following prolong engine life. table. Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds Units In mph (km/h) Engine Accel- 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 Size eration Rate 1.4L Accel 14 23 29 38 Turbo (23) (37) (47) (61) Cruise 12 18 25 32 (19) (29) (40) (52) CAUTION! If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and the transmission can result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift down to second or first gear when descending a steep grade. STARTING AND OPERATING 233 When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade, NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur- shifting out of PARK. dened. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. WARNING! • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 234 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/ STARTING AND OPERATING 235 OFF (key removal) position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and once removed, the transmission is locked in PARK. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). 5 Six-Speed Automatic Transmission The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK (Refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Shift Lever 236 STARTING AND OPERATING Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when and NEUTRAL. shifting between these gears. Gear Ranges The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick shift positions. Manual NEUTRAL into another gear range. shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further information). NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. in the AutoStick position (beside the DRIVE position) This is especially important when the engine is cold. will manually select the transmission gear, and will PARK (P) display the current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, This range supplements the parking brake by locking the 3, etc. transmission. The engine can be started in this range. NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK, Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for- motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the ward) it is probably in the AutoStick (+/-) position vehicle in this range. (beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the STARTING AND OPERATING 237 When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) 5 238 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children). A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 239 CAUTION! • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position. • Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. • With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) The following indicators should be used to ensure that Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posiperiods with the engine running. The engine may be tion: started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift • When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated. 5 240 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head winds), use the AutoStick shift control (refer to AutoStick in this section for further information) to select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. STARTING AND OPERATING 241 If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller will expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine coolant temperature. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission Normal operation will resume once the engine tempera- can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: ture has risen to a suitable level. Transmission Limp Home Mode 1. Stop the vehicle. Transmission function is monitored electronically for 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. 5. Restart the engine. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. 5 242 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position (beside the Drive position), it can be moved forward and rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument service is required. cluster. AUTOSTICK NOTE: In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever providing manual shift control, giving you more control rearward (+) or forward (-), except as described below. of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, • The transmission will automatically upshift when necessary to prevent engine over-speed. and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more control during passing, • The transmission will automatically downshift as the city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will and many other situations. display the current gear. STARTING AND OPERATING 243 • The transmission will automatically downshift to first • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver AutoStick is engaged. should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a vehicle is accelerated. fault or overheat condition is detected. • You can start out (from a stop) in first, second, or third To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the gear. Starting out in second or third gear can be helpful DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick in snow or icy conditions. To select second or third position at any time without taking your foot off the gear after the vehicle is brought to a stop, tap the shift accelerator pedal. lever rearward (+) once or twice. • The system will ignore shift commands that would cause engine lugging or overspeed. An audible beep will sound if an inappropriate gear is requested. • Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is engaged because the transmission will not shift automatically. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. 5 244 STARTING AND OPERATING DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Traction Acceleration When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front (driving) wheels. WARNING! Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.). 1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. 2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. 3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. 4. Keep tires properly inflated. 5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. STARTING AND OPERATING 245 DRIVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches/ Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. and Warnings before doing so. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. 5 246 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 247 POWER STEERING The electric power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If the electric steering system experiences a fault that prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle manually. WARNING! If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the EVIC screen, they indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred which caused an over temperature condition in the power steering system. Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed on the EVIC screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle Your Instrument Panel” for further information. needs to be taken to an authorized dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Continued operation with reduced or no power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be obtained as soon as possible. 5 248 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and during parking maneuvers. • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for service. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking Parking Brake brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the When the parking brake is applied with the ignition manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. switch in the MAR (ACC/ON/RUN) position, the Brake The parking brake lever is located in the center console. Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. The parking brake completely. STARTING AND OPERATING 249 should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever. • Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave a manual transmission in REVERSE or first (1st) gear. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. 5 250 STARTING AND OPERATING SPORT MODE Manual Transmission — If Equipped In Sport mode, the engine is more responsive to the throttle pedal, and provides more maximum torque by increasing turbo boost pressure. Steering feedback is improved, and steering effort is slightly higher. This driving mode is useful for spirited driving. 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Momentarily release the accelerator pedal. 3. Press the accelerator pedal again to activate. STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The Sport mode increases steering feedback to the driver with slight increase in effort and changes the transmission shift schedules for more aggressive shifting. This driving mode is useful while driving on twisty roads where more steering precision is desired in spirited cornering. 5 1. To activate the Sport mode, press the SPORT button. SPORT Button Once activated, a SPORT message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. 2. Press the SPORT button again to return to the standard driving mode. 252 STARTING AND OPERATING BRAKE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems loses normal capability, the remaining system will still function. However, there will be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may notice increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential activation of the “Brake System Warning Light”. Your vehicle is equipped with a advanced electronic brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC. In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e., repeated brake applications with the engine off) the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system operating. The Four-Wheel ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure, to prevent wheel lock-up and to help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces. Four-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The system’s pump motor runs during an ABS stop to provide regulated hydraulic pressure. The pump motor makes a low humming noise during operation, which is normal. STARTING AND OPERATING 253 The ABS includes an amber ABS Warning Light. When the light is illuminated, the ABS is not functioning. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. Turning the ignition Off and On again may reset the ABS if the fault detected was only momentary. WARNING! • Pumping the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. When you are in a severe braking condition involving the use of the ABS, you will experience some pedal drop as the vehicle comes to a stop. This is the result of the system reverting to the base brake system. Engagement of the ABS may be accompanied by a pulsing sensation. You may also hear a clicking noise. These occurrences are normal and indicate that the system is functioning properly. 5 254 STARTING AND OPERATING Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! • The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. • The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Traction Control System (TCS) The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping STARTING AND OPERATING 255 wheel(s) and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode or Full Off mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further information. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes his foot off the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel. HSA Activation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate: • Vehicle must be stopped. • Vehicle must be on a 2.5% (manual transmission) or 7% grade or greater (automatic transmission) grade hill. • Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle in NEUTRAL [manual transmission], vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). 5 256 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. Disabling/Enabling HSA Electronic Stability Control (ESC) The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteering or understeering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. If you wish to turn the HSA system on or off, it can be done using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than tion. appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. STARTING AND OPERATING 257 5 ESC Off Switch (Automatic Transmission) ESC Off Switch (Manual Transmission) NOTE: The ESC Off switch is located left of the steering column (Manual Transmission Only). 258 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has three available operating modes. Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in On mode. This mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below. Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch. This mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also intended for driving in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions, when more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. STARTING AND OPERATING 259 To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the switch mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF, again. This will restore the normal ESC On mode of except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS operation. section. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold the ESC OFF switch for five seconds. After five seconds, the ESC OFF Indicator Light will illuminate, and the WARNING! “ESC OFF” message will display in the EVIC. To turn When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC ON again, momentarily press the ESC OFF switch. ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off WARNING! Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “ParIn the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque tial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is reduction and stability features are cancelled. Theredisabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is by the ESC system is reduced. unavailable. The “Full Off” ESC mode is intended Full Off for off-highway or offroad use only. This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on public roadways. In this 5 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE: when the ignition switch is turned to the MAR • The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and (ACC/ON/RUN) position for four seconds. If the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on momentarily the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes each time the ignition switch is turned ON. on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been will be ON even if it was turned off previously. driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light (located off. in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ STARTING AND OPERATING 261 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE: Tire Markings • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 5 262 STARTING AND OPERATING • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or $....blank....$ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) STARTING AND OPERATING 263 EXAMPLE: R = Construction code – #R# means radial construction, or – #D# means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) 5 264 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire. date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Tire Identification Number (TIN) STARTING AND OPERATING 265 EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 266 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 267 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) Example Tire Placard Location (Door) 268 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. Loading Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section of this manual. STARTING AND OPERATING 269 NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard. “Vehicle Loading” in this manual. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and To determine the maximum loading conditions of your passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasXXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 5 270 STARTING AND OPERATING 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE: cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the ing table shows examples on how to calculate total amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration 650 lbs [295 kg]). purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo and load carry capacity of your vehicle. being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not • For the following example, the combined weight of safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs capacity calculated in step 4. (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 271 5 272 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort Safety WARNING! • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. • Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 273 WARNING! (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. Tread Wear Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability need for earlier tire replacement. of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability response or over responsiveness in the steering. Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. NOTE: Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause ride. erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. 5 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range inflated. of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. temperature changes. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire STARTING AND OPERATING 275 inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and Radial Ply Tires within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high WARNING! speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alequipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. combine them with other types of tires. 5 276 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Repair Tire Types If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped meets the following criteria: All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary • The tire has not been driven on when flat. between different all season tires. All season tires can be • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on (sidewall damage is not repairable). the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. WARNING! If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for Snow Tires recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires tire inflation pressures. during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. 5 278 STARTING AND OPERATING Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Spare Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a CAUTION! Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. compact or limited-use temporary spare installed. It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full Damage to the vehicle may result. capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- Wheel — If Equipped mation. Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire STARTING AND OPERATING 279 rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. tire rotation pattern. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped wheel on the vehicle at any given time. The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a WARNING! compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be 80D18 103M. replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which T, S = Temporary Spare Tire apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled Full Size Spare — If Equipped on your vehicle at the first opportunity. The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the 5 280 STARTING AND OPERATING front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. WARNING! Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Tire Spinning When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. STARTING AND OPERATING 281 Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. Tread Wear Indicators 5 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread replaced. grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is 282 STARTING AND OPERATING worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. • Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacewith oil, grease, and gasoline. ment. Replacement Tires • Distance driven. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced STARTING AND OPERATING 283 wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. (Continued) 5 284 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. CAUTION! Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices are not recommended. CAUTION! Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used. TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. STARTING AND OPERATING 285 These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed. 5 Tire Rotation 286 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire. mended cold tire pressure. TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (6.5° C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold tire pressure on the placard. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 287 For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) tire pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F (20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7° C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be on. In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to your local dealer to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. 5 288 STARTING AND OPERATING • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care the tire. and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire Base System failure or condition. NOTE: • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the instrument cluster. The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger and to maintain the proper pressure. illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. STARTING AND OPERATING 289 The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver Module. • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors. • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information. Check TPMS Warnings The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system fault is detected, and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” text message will display. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following scenarios: The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, an audible chime will be activated, and the “Check left or right front/rear tire xxx.x psi” text message will display when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate 1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the pressure value. The system will automatically update TPM sensors. and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish 2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting once the updated tire pressures have been received. The that affects radio wave signals. 5 290 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the #Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System# message will be displayed. NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact 4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will spare wheel and tire assembly. sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure solid and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Unavailable” monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monimessage will be displayed. tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire. 5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warntire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure and the “Check Tire Pressure” message will still turn warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The ON due to the low tire. vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minabove 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure receive this information. STARTING AND OPERATING 291 Enhanced TPM System The TPMS consists of the following components: When the vehicle is equipped with an enhanced TPM • Receiver module system, the driver can view text messages showing the • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors actual tire pressure value by position by selecting the tire pressure menu command in the instrument cluster. Refer • Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages, to ”Instrument Panel Features” in “Understanding Your which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Instrument Panel” for further information. Center (EVIC) Premium TPM System • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the readings to the receiver module. four active road tires. In addition, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure tire highlighted in a different color. 5 292 STARTING AND OPERATING system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will sound a chime and also display a “Service Tire Pressure Low Tire Indicator Monitoring System” message in the EVIC for approxiShould this occur, you should stop as soon as possible mately 5 seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of and inflate the tires with low pressure to the vehicle’s the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the received. STARTING AND OPERATING 293 A system fault can occur due to any of the following: 1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. 4. Using tire chains on the vehicle. Service TPM System Message If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the “Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. The EVIC will also display a #Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System# message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected. In this case, the #Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System# message is then followed with a graphic display with pressure values still 5 294 STARTING AND OPERATING shown. This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as the #Service Tire Pressure Monitoring System# message is displayed. Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a “Service TPM System” message and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on • The TPMS will not monitor the pressure in a replacesolid, and the EVIC will display a “Service Tire Presment tire installed without a tire pressure sensor. sure Monitoring System” message and dashes (- -) in • If you install a replacement tire in place of a road tire place of the pressure value. that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning Once you repair or replace the original road tire and limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire reinstall it, the TPMS will update automatically. In addiPressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and tion, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the turn off and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new EVIC will still display a pressure value highlighted in pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire a different color. pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any • After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. NOTE: STARTING AND OPERATING 295 General Information FUEL REQUIREMENTS This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions: This engine is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when us• This device may not cause harmful interference. ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso• This device must accept any interference received, line with a minimum octane rating of 87. including interference that may cause undesired op- For optimum performance and fuel economy the use of eration. 91 octane or higher is recommended. The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to following licenses: your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at United States Canada MRXC4W4MA4 2546A-C4W4MA4 (Single) high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle. 5 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle. CAUTION! Do not use gasoline containing Methanol or E-85 Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline system components. blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- does not have the negative effects of Methanol. genates such as 10% Ethanol, Methyl Tert-Butyl Ether E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (MTBE), and Ethyl Tret-Butyl Ether (ETBE). Oxygenates Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoare required in some areas of the country during the line containing up to 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. STARTING AND OPERATING 297 If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline • Operate in a lean mode. without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether • Poor engine performance. the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost. Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel. 5 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! (Continued) CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. (Continued) • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. (Continued) • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. • Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle. 5 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL CAUTION! Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) The gas cap is located on the passenger side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle. Fuel Filler Cap • Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel when the engine is running. It may cause the MIL to turn on and could cause a fire. • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. • If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a #clicking# sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message NOTE: will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving is full. the problem will turn the MIL off. • Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly TRAILER TOWING tightened. Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended. 5 302 STARTING AND OPERATING RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheels OFF the Ground NONE Dolly Tow Front Rear ALL On Trailer Manual Transmission Transmission in NEUTRAL OK NOT ALLOWED OK Automatic Transmission NOT ALLOWED OK NOT ALLOWED OK STARTING AND OPERATING 303 This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. CAUTION! This vehicle may also be towed using a tow dolly (with the front wheels OFF the ground). DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may be flat towed (with all four wheels on the ground) at any legal highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .307 ! JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .308 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .309 ! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . ▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .310 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . ▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .313 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . ! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 ! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 . . . . . .320 . . . . . .321 . . . . . .322 . . . . . .323 . . . . . .327 . . . . . .328 . . . . . .329 . . . . . .331 6 306 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ! SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .335 ▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 307 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the instrument panel below the radio. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down. tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed. turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down Do not use this emergency warning system when the an impending overheat condition: vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate with • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flashers to high. This allows the heater core to act as a may wear down your battery. supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 6 308 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! (Continued) Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time (Continued) TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h). WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 309 Tire Service Kit Storage Tire Service Kit Components And Operation The Tire Service Kit is located under the front driver’s seat. 6 Tire Service Kit Components Tire Service Kit Location 1 2 3 4 — — — — Sealant Bottle Deflation Button Pressure Gauge Power Button 5 — Mode Select Knob 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear) 7 — Air Pump Hose (Black) 8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit) 310 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode. Selecting Air Mode Using The Power Button Push and release the Power Button (4) once to turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air this mode. pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated. Selecting Sealant Mode Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions turn to this position to inject the Tire • Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to (6) when selecting this mode. assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 311 from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded. • For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire Service Kit. • You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob • The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one (5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to tire application use and need to be replaced after each avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit use. Always replace these components immediately at Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼” your original equipment vehicle dealer. (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle. • When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form, • Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses. clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material 6 312 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when using the Tire Service Kit. • Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle under the following circumstances: – If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately 1/4” (6 mm) or larger. – If the tire has any sidewall damage. – If the tire has any damage from driving with extremely low tire pressure. – If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat tire. – If the wheel has any damage. – If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or the wheel. • Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or heat source. • A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. • Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any contact with clothing. (Continued) (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 313 WARNING! (Continued) • Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately. Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit (A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers. on the ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding. 3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition in the OFF position. 4. Set the parking brake. (B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit: 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Sealant Mode position. 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap 2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the from the fitting at the end of the hose. deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to 3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the deflated tire. reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat 6 314 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the tire. valve stem. If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the seconds through the Sealant Hose (6): vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or nails) from the tire. (C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The Deflated Tire: Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit. • Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire Service Kit. 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the available. Make sure the engine is running before parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL. turning ON the Tire Service Kit. • After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the 3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous use. Call for assistance. Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 315 NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6). latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3). If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes: Sealant Hose (6): • The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no the vehicle further. Call for assistance. longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as mended inflation pressure before continuing. 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes: empty. 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediKit. ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to 2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruindicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side ment panel. 6 316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.” (D) Drive Vehicle: Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h). CAUTION! WARNING! • The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get hot after use, so it should be handled carefully. • Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal Tire Service Kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit. Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317 (E) After Driving: If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher: Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing. and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and loading information label on the driver-side door 1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air opening. Mode position. NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Defla2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet. mended inflation pressure before continuing. 3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from stem. 12 Volt outlet. 4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure 3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in Gauge (3). the vehicle. If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar): 4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire the vehicle further. Call for assistance. service center. 6 318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit housing. panel after the tire has been repaired. 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posthe front of the housing. Push the bottle into the sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacehousing. An audible click will be heard indicating the ment”. bottle is locked into place. NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authorized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed 6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its using the Tire Service Kit. storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump). (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement: 7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the 1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color). vehicle. 2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the recessed area under the sealant bottle. 3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose of it accordingly. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319 **Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure tightening. that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. properly calibrated torque wrench. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/ Bolt Size 66 Ft-Lbs (90 N·m) Steel Wheels Only 75 Ft-Lbs (100 N·m) Aluminum Wheels Only M12 x 1.25 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 17 mm 6 Wheel Mounting Surface 320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! Torque Patterns After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321 WARNING! (Continued) • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. • The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Jack Location The jack and jack wrench tool are stowed in a bag under the front driver’s seat. 6 Jack And Jack-Handle Location 322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. 3. Set the parking brake. 4. Place the shift lever in REVERSE. 5. Turn Off the ignition. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323 Jacking Instructions WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. (Continued) • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 6 324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Jack Warning Label CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. Center Cap Removal 1. Remove the scissors jack and tool bag from under the NOTE: Before using the swivel wrench to remove the driver’s seat. wheel bolts be sure to remove the center cap of the wheel by inserting the angled tab end of the swivel wrench into 2. Remove center cap (if equipped). the notched part of the center cap. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325 3. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel bolts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each side of the body (as indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill molding). 6 Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged. Front Jacking Location 4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed. 326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 5. Using the swivel wrench, raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability. 6. Remove the wheel bolts and pull the wheel off the hub. For vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, the center caps must be removed to remove the wheel bolts. WARNING! Jack Location WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury. 7. Install the wheel and wheel bolts with the cone shaped end of the bolts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327 bolts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURE jack, do not tighten the bolts fully until the vehicle has If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpbeen lowered. started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in 8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left. another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly 9. Finish tightening the bolts. Push down on the wrench so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. while tightening the wheel bolts. Alternate bolts until each bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Torque NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, Specifications” in this section for proper lug bolt follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and torque. If you doubt that you have tightened the bolts precautions. correctly, have them checked with a torque wrench by WARNING! your authorized dealer or service station. 10. Disassemble the jack and tools and place them in the bag. Stow it under the driver’s seat and secure the bag to the floor with the straps attached to the floor of the vehicle. 11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct the tire pressure as required. Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 6 328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located on the left side of the engine compartment. Battery Posts 1 — Positive Battery (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap) 2 — Negative Battery Post (-) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329 WARNING! 3. Remove the protective cover over the positive (+) battery post. To remove the cover pull upward on the cover. • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. 1. Set the parking brake, shift the transmission into gear and turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK. WARNING! 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. 6 330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle underhood compartment) away from the battery. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then turn the key to RUN position on the vehicle with the discharged battery. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331 6. Once the vehicle is started, remove the jumper cables FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE in the reverse sequence: If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the Disconnecting The Jumper Cables steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE engine ground (-) of the vehicle with the discharged and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear battery. and REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper engine. cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle, you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer. 6 332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). NOTE: Push the #ESC Off# switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in #Partial Off# mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the #ESC Off# switch again to restore #ESC On# mode. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333 WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lever override access cover (located on the right side of the shift lever housing) by prying at the bottom edge of the cover. 6 334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Push and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole, and push and hold the override release lever in. 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover. Shift Lever Override Access Hole WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 335 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Rear Front ALL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD MANUAL TRANSMISSION If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 65 mph (104 km/h) max speed NOT ALLOWED OK BEST METHOD 6 336 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent CAUTION! (Continued) damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- • When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is Damage to your vehicle may result from improper mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to towing. main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding Automatic Transmission vehicles under tow must be observed. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off position. the ground). CAUTION! • Do not use sling-type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. (Continued) If the ignition key is unavailable, or the battery is discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK in order to move the vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 337 CAUTION! • DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a conventional automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Manual Transmission • Vehicle can be flat towed (all four wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL. • Vehicle can be towed with the front wheels elevated. • Vehicle can be towed on a flatbed truck (all wheels off the ground). CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .341 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 ! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .342 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 ! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .345 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .368 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .368 7 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 ! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 ▫ Underhood Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL). . .388 ! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 ! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 ! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam . . . . . .385 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ▫ Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 GENUINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO 7 1 2 3 4 — — — — Engine Coolant Reservoir Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir Front Distribution Unit (Fuses) 5 — Battery 6 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light ready for testing. (MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently happen: serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. the ignition or start the engine. This means that your Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if not proceed to the I/M station. your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully following: illuminated until you place the ignition in the off 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do position or start the engine. This means that your not crank or start the engine. vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 7 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. use of parts which are not quality-equivalent to genuine parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control running. systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 WARNING! CAUTION! You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. 7 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading. Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, and approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range. CAUTION! Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfilling the engine with oil will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This loss of oil pressure and increased oil temperature could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever occurs first. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaFor best performance and maximum protection for turtion. bocharged engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends synthetic engine Materials Added To Engine Oil oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engiEngine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) neered product and its performance may be impaired by SAE 5W-40 full synthetic engine oil is recommended for supplemental additives. Engine Oil Selection all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service ber should not be used. station or governmental agency for advice on how and The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on your area. 7 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended. Engine Air Cleaner Filter WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters maintenance intervals. varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. • The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). 7 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf — If Equipped HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning A/C Air Filter service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. WARNING! NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result. 7 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the 2. Pull the console closeout cover rearward to disengage lower right of center console. Perform the following the front retaining tab and remove the cover. procedure to replace the filter: 1. Remove the Torx® screw that secures the passenger side console closeout cover. Console Closeout Panel 3. Remove the two 5.5 mm screws (1 and 2) that secure the particulate air filter cover to the HVAC housing. Torx® Screw Location MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353 7 Air Filter Cover Screw Locations A/C Air Filter 4. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of 5. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position the housing. Take note of the air filter position indicaindicators pointing in the same direction as removal. tors. 354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® maintenance intervals. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. 6. Install the passenger side console closeout. Body Lubrication Windshield Wiper Blades Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355 Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 1 — Wiper Arm sary. 2 — Pivot Cap Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this ward unless the pivot cap is raised first. will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper liftgate glass. blade off of the liftgate glass. 7 356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press blade holder. the wiper blade until it snaps into place. 5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into place. Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section for further information. 1 2 3 4 — — — — Wiper Blade Blade Pivot Pin Wiper Arm Wiper Blade Holder MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357 WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. 7 358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System age: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. WARNING! • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position. • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. 7 360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to months (before the onset of freezing weather, where MS.90032). applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti- maintenance intervals. freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any Selection Of Coolant accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. face of the condenser. Coolant Checks Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is 7 362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioncoolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant your vehicle. (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the Please review these recommendations for using Organic engine cooling system. Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maindard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where • We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant the vehicle is operated. 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler NOTE: Material Standard MS.90032. • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanlead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concenneeded to be added to the system please contact your trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below local authorized dealer. −34° F (−37° C) are anticipated. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363 • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) remains pressurized. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. WARNING! • The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. 7 364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is month. a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani- maintain the proper level, it should be added to the mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant bottle. Do not overfill. engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in Points To Remember puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ spills immediately. kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is norCoolant Level mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapormethod for determining that the coolant level is ad- ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the bottom and top lines marked “COLD FILL If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be RANGE”. safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365 • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in condenser clean. the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter expansion bottle must also be protected against freezoperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ing. ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emisrequired, the cooling system should be pressure tested sions. for leaks. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. 7 366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce braking capacity in an emergency. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both the brake system and the clutch release system. The two systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one system will not affect the other system. The manual transmission clutch release system should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the Brake Master Cylinder brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a when performing under hood services, or immediately if result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See the “Brake Warning Light” is on. your local authorized dealer for service. Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Reremoving the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Mainfluid level up to the requirements described on the brake taining Your Vehicle” for further information. fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. (Continued) 7 368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission. Manual Transmission — If Equipped Lubricant Selection Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Please see your authorized dealer for service. Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water. NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately. Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in Automatic Transmission — If Equipped “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Selection Of Lubricant Fluid Level Check It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. point not more than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain of the hole. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369 the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The manufacturer strongly recommends against using Fluid Level Check any special additives in the transmission. The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the 7 370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. CAUTION! If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. Fluid And Filter Changes required. However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the The following maintenance recommendations will enable life of the vehicle. Routine fluid and filter changes are not you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371 • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of and Tar Remover to remove. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® The most common causes are: Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. What Causes Corrosion? • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. 7 372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive packaged and sealed. near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as open. possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Special Care touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care considered the responsibility of the owner. • All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner. the owner. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373 NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. 7 374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Interior Care Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. CAUTION! Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375 CAUTION! Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows Cleaning Headlights equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror. Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Instrument Panel Cover reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folminimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use lowed by rinsing. protectants or other products which may cause undesirDo not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. low glare surface. 7 376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Instrument Panel Bezels CAUTION! When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully. Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377 WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. (Continued) 7 378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. Interior Fuses The interior fuse panel is part of the Body Control Module (BCM) and is located on the driver’s side under the instrument panel. Fuse Panel Cavity 1 2 Vehicle Fuse Number F12 F32 Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 3 F53 5 Amp Tan Description Right Low Beam Front and Rear Ceiling Lights Trunk and Door Courtesy Lights Instrument Panel Node MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379 Cavity 4 5 Vehicle Fuse Number F38 F36 Mini Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 6 7 8 9 10 F43 F48 F13 F50 F51 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 7.5 Amp Brown 5 Amp Tan 11 12 F37 F49 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan 13 14 F31 F47 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow Description Central Door Locking Diagnostic Socket, Car Radio, Climate Control System Bi-Directional Washer Passenger Power Window Left Low Beam, Headlamp Leveling Airbag Car Radio Switch, Climate Control System, Stop Light, Clutch Stop Light Switch, Instrument Panel Node Exterior Mirror, GPS, Electric Mirror, Parking Sensor Ignition, Climate Control Driver Power Window 7 380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Underhood Fuses The Front Distribution Unit is located on the right side of the engine compartment, next to the battery. To access the fuses, press the release tabs and remove the cover. Front Distribution Unit The ID number of the electrical component corresponding to each fuse can be found on the back of the cover. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381 Cavity F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10 F11 F11 F14 F15 Maxi Fuse 60 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Orange 70 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 30 Amp Green 40 Amp Orange 40 Amp Orange – – – – – – Mini Fuse – – – – – – – – – 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 5 Amp Tan 15 Amp Blue Description Body Controller Audio Amplifier Ignition Switch Anti-Lock Brake Pump Electric Power Steering Radiator Fan - Single Speed Radiator Fan - Low Speed Radiator Fan - High Speed Blower Motor Powertrain Horn Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) High Beam (Shutter) Cigar Lighter 7 382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F16 F17 F17 F18 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 F30 F82 F83 F84 Maxi Fuse – – – – – – – – – – – – 30 Amp Green 20 Amp Yellow – Mini Fuse 7.5 Amp Brown 25 Amp Clear 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 5 Amp Tan 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 7.5 Amp Brown 15 Amp Blue – – 10 Amp Red Description Transmission Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Powertrain Powertrain Powertrain (Multiair – If Equipped) Air Conditioning Heated Seats – If Equipped Fuel Pump Powertrain Anti-Lock Brake Valves Stability Control System Fog Lamps Sunroof/Convertible Top Cooling Pump – If Equipped Transmission MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383 Cavity F85 F87 F90 Maxi Fuse 30 Amp Green – – VEHICLE STORAGE Mini Fuse – 5 Amp Tan 5 Amp Tan Description Rear Defroster Rear Defroster Heated Mirrors – If Equipped • Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 • Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of days, you may want to take these steps to protect your service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the battery. air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS Interior Bulbs Overhead Lamp Courtesy Lamp Bulb Number C5W W5W Exterior Bulbs Front Low and High Beam Headlamp Front Parking/Daytime Running Lamps Front Fog Lamps Front Side Marker Lamps Front Turn Signal Lamps Side Direction Lamps Rear Turn Signal Lamps Rear Side Marker Lamps Bulb Number HIR2LL W21/5W H11LL W3W WY21W WY5W PY21W W3W MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385 Rear Tail and Stop Lamps Rear Backup Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp License Plate Lamps Bulb Number P21/5W W16W W5W LED (See Authorized dealer) NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual. BULB REPLACEMENT Headlamps Low Beam and High Beam NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo- 1. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the headlamp spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric housing. conditions change to allow the condensation to change 2. Rotate the bulb counter-clockwise. back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. 3. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 4. Install the bulb and rotate clockwise to lock in place. 5. Reinstall the plastic cap. 7 386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Front Turn Signal, Parking And Daytime Running Lamps 3. Remove the plastic cap from the back of the lamp housing. 1. Turn the steering wheel completely to the left or right. 4. Rotate bulb/socket counter-clockwise. 2. Open the wheel housing access door. 5. Remove the bulb and replace as needed. 6. Install the bulb into socket, and rotate bulb/socket clockwise into lamp locking it in place. 7. Reinstall the plastic cap. Wheel Housing Access Door MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387 Front Fog Lamps Rear Tail, Stop, Backup And Turn Signal Lamps To replace the front fog lights, see your authorized dealer. 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the two screws and remove the tail lamp assembly. 1. Remove portion of the wheel liner to allow hand access to side marker lamp. Front/Rear Side Marker Lamps 2. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise, and remove the bulb and socket assembly from the housing. 3. Pull the bulb from the socket and insert the replacement bulb. 7 4. Install the bulb and socket assembly into the housing, and rotate the socket clockwise to lock it in place. 5. Reinstall the wheel liner. Tail Lamp Assembly Screws 388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Remove four screws and separate the backplate from 3. Disconnect the electric connector. the lamp housing. 4. Press the retaining device and open the bulb holder. 4. Remove the tail, stop, or turn signal bulbs by pushing 5. Remove the snap-fitted bulb to be replaced and rethem slightly and turning counter-clockwise. place it. 5. Remove the backup lamp bulb by pulling straight out. 6. Close the back cap locking it properly. 6. Replace lamps as required and reinstall lamp. 7. Reinstall the two fastening screws and reinstall the guard caps. Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 1. Remove the two guard caps and the two fastening screws. 2. Remove the center high mounted stop lamp assembly. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 389 FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Engine Oil with Filter 1.4 Liter Turbo Engine Cooling System 1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Manual Transmission 1.4 Liter Turbo Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula) — with Automatic Transmission U.S. 10.5 Gallons Metric 40 Liters 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters 4.6 Quarts 4.4 Liters 5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters 7 390 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs Fuel Selection Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-90032. We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-40 Full Synthetic Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade. We recommend you use a MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter. We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs. 87 Octane Acceptable – 91 Octane Recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 391 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) 7 392 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Chassis Component Manual Transmission – If Equipped Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Brake Master Cylinder Convertible Top Rails – If Equipped Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR® C635 DDCT/MTX Transmission Fluid Use only MOPAR® AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use Berulub FR 43. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS ! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 ▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 8 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed. Severe operating conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months, whichever comes first. Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395 Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: Check engine oil level Check windshield washer fluid level Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir and brake master cylinder as needed Check function of all interior and exterior lights Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Change oil and filter. Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. 8 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Maintenance Chart Additional Inspections Inspect the CV joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, boot seals, and replace if necessary. Inspect brake linings, replace if needed. Inspect parking brake function, adjust as necessary. Additional Maintenance Replace cabin/air conditioning filter. Clean and lube sun roof tracks. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Or Kilometers: 32,000 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 397 Replace engine air filter. Replace the spark plugs. ** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. Replace the timing belt. X X ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X X X X X X X X 8 X 398 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .403 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .404 ! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM ▫ FIAT Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 ▫ FIAT Canada Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .401 ▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 ▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 9 400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE current problem. The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally Prepare A List interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services. specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an service advisor know. authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401 facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) correctly and in a timely manner. • Vehicle delivery date and mileage This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FIAT Customer Center solved with this process. P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the 1-888-242-6342 general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. FIAT Canada Customer Center They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-800• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- 465-2001 (English) Phone: 1-800-387-9983 (French) cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech center. Impaired (TDD/TTY) Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenTo assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the ter should include the following information: manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni• Owner’s name and address cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who 9 402 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Service Contract Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents. repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited We appreciate that you have made a major investment Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related have any questions about the service contract, call the concerns. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 403 WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in WARRANTY INFORMATION individual problems between you, your authorized See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the dealer, and the manufacturer. DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA USA LLC To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. 9 404 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE You can also obtain other information about motor NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. In Canada Service Manuals If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety/ These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA USA LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 405 problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot- • Call toll free at: ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) and a complete list of all tools and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Owner’s Manuals Or These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac- • Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: quaint you with specific FCA USA LLC vehicles. In- www.techauthority.com cluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM and safety tips. TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. 9 406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety Traction Grades requirements in addition to these grades. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on Treadwear wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforconditions on a specified government test course. For mance. example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded WARNING! 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on significantly from the norm due to variations in driving straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not habits, service practices, and differences in road charac- include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or teristics and climate. peak traction characteristics. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 407 Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. 9 INDEX 10 410 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .348 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Automatic Dimming Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .214 Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 INDEX 411 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . Fluid And Filter Changes . Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . Fluid Level Check . . . . . . Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . Special Additives . . . . . . Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 .370 .370 .369 .392 .236 .369 .242 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .18 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .389 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Caps, Filler Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 10 412 INDEX Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .148 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .69 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .68 Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .63 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .59 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 .211 .366 .366 .210 .279 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 .207 .402 .389 .359 .361 .360 .364 .360 .364 INDEX 413 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 .363 .360 .370 .148 .136 .400 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .119 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .161 Exit Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 New Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Start Of Trip Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 Emergency, In Case Of Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 10 414 INDEX Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .342 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .49 Euro Twin Clutch Transmission Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 INDEX 415 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .390 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297 Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Specifications . Tank Capacity . Fueling . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 .389 .300 .377 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . Gasoline, Reformulated . . . Gauges Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . Gear Select Lever Override General Information . . . . . General Maintenance. . . . . Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 .296 .295 .296 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 .236 .333 .295 .345 .375 10 416 INDEX Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374 Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Jacking Instructions . Jack Location . . . . . Jack Operation . . . . Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 .321 .320 .327 Key-In Reminder . . . . . . Key, Replacement . . . . . . Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 .14 .11 .13 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 INDEX 417 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . .148 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .148 Loading Vehicle Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Locks Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319 10 418 INDEX Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine). . . . . . .342 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Frequency Of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Media Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 INDEX 419 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .268 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .133 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Power Convertible Top Function . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 10 420 INDEX Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .208 Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Engage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . . . .38 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Seat Belt Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode . . . . . . .38 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 INDEX 421 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 SENTRY KEY® FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Specifications Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sport Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 .119 .250 .227 .227 .228 .229 .227 . . . . . . . . . .247 .118 .118 .208 .208 .383 .220 .383 .331 10 422 INDEX Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .39 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .214 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . .267 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286 .148 .405 .275 .282 .284 .261 .262 .277 .280 .281 .261 .308 .107 .301 .335 .302 .302 .244 INDEX 423 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Transaxle Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .18 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 .405 .207 .295 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268 Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .148 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Washer Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 10 424 INDEX Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. 2015 FIAT 500 ABARTH 2015 OWNER’S MANUAL FCA US LLC 15FX24-126-AD Fourth Edition Printed in U.S.A. FIAT 500 ABARTH INCLUDES CABRIO